arxmliv
arxmliv build tool
 
KWARC group
LaTeXML
About
   
 

Back to Homepage

--- /arXMLiv/repos/arXMLiv/trunk/sty/0089.cls	2010-04-01 16:55:29.000000000 +0200
+++ /arXMLiv/repos/arXMLiv/trunk/sty/journal.cls	2012-08-16 17:07:44.879591234 +0200
@@ -1,1150 +1,4442 @@
-% This is aa.cls
-% A&A DOCUMENT CLASS -- version 6.1 for LaTeX2e
+%%
+%% IEEEtran.cls 2007/03/05 version V1.7a
+%%
+%%
+%% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of
+%% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and
+%% conferences.
+%%
+%% Support sites:
+%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
+%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
+%% and
+%% http://www.ieee.org/
+%%
+%% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes
+%% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version.
+%%
+%%
+%% Contributors:
+%% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993),
+%% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996),
+%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2007)
+%%
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi,
+%%                         Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter,
+%%                         Juergen von Hagen
+%%                         and
+%% Copyright (c) 2001-2007 by Michael Shell
+%%
+%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.7): Michael Shell
+%%                                    See:
+%%                                    http://www.michaelshell.org/
+%%                                    for current contact information.
+%%
+%% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
+%% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command
+%% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package.
+%%
+%%*************************************************************************
+%% Legal Notice:
+%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
+%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE!
+%% User assumes all risk.
+%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for
+%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,
+%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse
+%% of any information contained here.
+%%
+%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not
+%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.
+%%
+%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)
+%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,
+%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included
+%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released
+%% 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.
+%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including  **
+%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
+%%
+%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
+%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
+%%
+%% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an
+%% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will
+%% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA.
+%% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version
+%% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls".
+%% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user,
+%% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the
+%% correct version information.
+%% The changes should also be documented via source comments.
+%%*************************************************************************
+%%
+%
+% Available class options
+% e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran}
+%
+%             *** choose only one from each category ***
+%
+% 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
+%    Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt.
+%
+% conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca
+%    determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers,
+%    correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user
+%    should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like
+%    journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for
+%    anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is
+%    repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review
+%    papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will
+%    automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the
+%    cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are
+%    not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like
+%    peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted
+%    as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact
+%    information can be easily seen on the cover page.
+%    The default is journal.
+%
+% draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final
+%    determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for
+%    handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version.
+%    draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX
+%    packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows
+%    for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like
+%    draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot
+%    of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably
+%    also want to select onecolumn.
+%    The default is final.
+%
+% letterpaper, a4paper
+%    determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER
+%    SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS
+%    WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will
+%    have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer
+%    bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top
+%    margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered.
+%    For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in)
+%    paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing
+%    (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document.
+%    Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins.
+%    IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex
+%    (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more
+%    important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for
+%    dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the
+%    testflow documentation
+%    http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow
+%    for more details on dvips paper size configuration.
+%    The default is letterpaper.
+%
+% oneside, twoside
+%    determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex)
+%    printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of
+%    the pages.
+%    The default is oneside.
+%
+% onecolumn, twocolumn
+%    determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One
+%    column mode is usually used only with draft papers.
+%    The default is twocolumn.
+%
+% compsoc
+%    Use the format of the IEEE Computer Society.
+%
+% romanappendices
+%    Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls
+%    now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what
+%    v1.6b and earlier did.
+%
+% captionsoff
+%    disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals
+%    request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages
+%    of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat
+%    package can be used with this class option to achieve this format.
+%
+% nofonttune
+%    turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those
+%    not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned"
+%    their fonts.
+%    The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters.
+%
+%
+%----------
+% Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted):
+% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch
+% \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin
+% \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin
+% \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin
+% \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin
+%
+% Available CLASSINFOs provided:
+% \ifCLASSINFOpdf                       (TeX if conditional)
+% \CLASSINFOpaperwidth                  (macro)
+% \CLASSINFOpaperheight                 (macro)
+% \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip      (length)
+% \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length)
+%
+% Available CLASSOPTIONs provided:
+% all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted,
+% e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
+% point size options provided as a single macro:
+% \CLASSOPTIONpt
+% which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's
+% normalsize point size.
+% also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview
+% and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls
+
+
+
+
+
+\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2007/03/05 V1.7a by Michael Shell]
+\typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.}
+\typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+
+% IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3
+% These values serve as a way a .tex file can
+% determine if the new features are provided.
+% The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from
+% these values. i.e., V1.4
+% KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that-
+% (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here)
+\def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1}
+\def\IEEEtransversionminor{7}
+
+% These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls
+\newif\if@restonecol
+\newif\if@titlepage
+
+
+% class option conditionals
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn       \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn       \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside         \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside         \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal           \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft           \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls        \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot  \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview      \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca    \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal         \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference      \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote        \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune      \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff     \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc         \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse
+
+
+% class info conditionals
+
+% indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output
+\newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf               \CLASSINFOpdffalse
+
+
+% V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper
+\newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper       \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
+
+
+
+% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers
+% dimen
+\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+% count
+\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA
+\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
+% token list
+\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA
+
+% we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs)
+% as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some
+% external packages
+\def\@ptsize{0}
+% LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt
+\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}}
+\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}}
+\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}}
+\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}}
+
+
+
+\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}%
+                            \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}%
+                            \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
+                            \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}%
+                            \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}%
+                            \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}}
+
+
+\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}%
+                        \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}%
+                        \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue
+                        \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}%
+                        \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}%
+                        \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}}
+
+\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse
+                        \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse}
+\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue
+                        \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse}
+
+\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse}
+\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse}
+
+% If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages
+% will go into draft mode.
+\DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
+                      \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
+% draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages
+% used by the document.
+\DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
+                         \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
+% draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer.
+\DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
+                               \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue}
+\DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
+                      \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
+
+\DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
+                        \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
+
+\DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
+                           \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
+
+\DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
+                         \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue}
+
+\DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
+                           \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
+
+\DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue
+                             \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
+
+\DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue}
+
+\DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue}
+
+\DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue}
+
+\DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue}
+
+
+% default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal
+\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal}
+% overrride these defaults per user requests
+\ProcessOptions
+
+
+
+% Computer Society conditional execution command
+\long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
+% inverse
+\long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
+% compsoc conference
+\long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
+% compsoc not conference
+\long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
+
+
+% IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times.
+% These three commands make up the entire times.sty package.
+\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv}
+\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}
+\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr}
+
+\@IEEEcompsoconly{\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}}
+
+% V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font,
+% not Times Roman.
+\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}}
+
+% enable Times/Palatino main text font
+\normalfont\selectfont
+
+
+
+
+
+% V1.7 conference notice message hook
+\def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}%
+\typeout{** Conference Paper **}%
+\typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}%
+\typeout{}%
+\typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}%
+\typeout{ of your paper;}%
+\typeout{}%
+\typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}%
+\typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}%
+\typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}%
+\typeout{}}
+
+
+% we can send console reminder messages to the user here
+\AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi}
+
+
+% warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else%
+  \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else%
+   \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}%
+  \fi%
+\fi
+
+
+% V1.7 improved paper size setting code.
+% Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that
+% of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered,
+% even if only effect is to set them to \relax.
+% if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special
+{\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{%
+% pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax
+% check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput
+% under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput.
+\@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth
+\global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}%
+% if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special
+\ifcase\pdfoutput
+\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}%
+\else
+% we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag
+\global\CLASSINFOpdftrue
+\fi}}
+
+% let the user know the selected papersize
+\typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space
+(\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.}
+
+\ifCLASSINFOpdf
+\typeout{-- Using PDF output.}
+\else
+\typeout{-- Using DVI output.}
+\fi
+
+
+% The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{}
+% automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{},
+% \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc.
+% However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as
+% well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues
+% that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}.
+% We'll leave this as an open future suggestion.
+%\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}}
+%\def\@journal{}
+
+
+
+% pointsize values
+% used with ifx to determine the document's normal size
+\def\@IEEEptsizenine{9}
+\def\@IEEEptsizeten{10}
+\def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11}
+\def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12}
+
+
+
+% FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed)
+% V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and
+%      revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems
+%      on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want
+%      normalsize     #lines/column  baselineskip (aka leading)
+%             9pt     63             11.0476pt (truncated down)
+%            10pt     58             12pt      (exact)
+%            11pt     52             13.3846pt (truncated down)
+%            12pt     50             13.92pt   (exact)
 %
-% LaTeX document class for Astronomy and Astrophysics journal
+
+% we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size
+% in case baselinestretch ever changes.
+% this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink
+\newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
+\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip
+
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
+\typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.}
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}%
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}%
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt%
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt%
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt
+\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}}
+\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
+\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
+\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
+% sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt
+\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}}
+\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}}
+\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}}
+\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}}
+\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}}
+\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}}
+\fi
+
+
+% Check if we have selected 10 points
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
+\typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.}
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}%
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}%
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt%
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt%
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt
+\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}}
+\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
+\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
+\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
+% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt
+\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}}
+\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
+\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
+\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
+\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
+\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
+\fi
+
+
+% Check if we have selected 11 points
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
+\typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.}
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}%
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}%
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt%
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt%
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt
+\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
+\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
+\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
+\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
+% sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt
+\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}}
+\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
+\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
+\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
+\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
+\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
+\fi
+
+
+% Check if we have selected 12 points
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
+\typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.}
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}%
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}%
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt%
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt%
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt
+\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
+\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
+\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
+\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
+% sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt
+\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}}
+\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}}
+\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}}
+\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}}
+\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}}
+\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
+\fi
+
+
+% V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for
+% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution
+% tolerance to turn off this warning
+\def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt}
+% However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed.
+
+
+% warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with
+% technote
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else%
+  \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}%
+ \fi%
+\fi
+
+
+% V1.7
+% Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with
+% OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use
+% available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts.
+\def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family
+\def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family
+\def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family
+\def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family
+\def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode
+\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else
+\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else
+\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
+\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
+\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else
+\kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax}
+
+
+
+
+% set the default \baselinestretch
+\def\baselinestretch{1}
+\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+  \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes
+\fi
+
+
+% process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch
+\ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined
+\else
+  \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override
+  \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to
+           \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
+\fi
+
+\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect
+
+
+
+
+% store the normalsize baselineskip
+\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip
+\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax
+% and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip
+% we could save a register by giving the user access to
+% \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect
+% its read only internal status
+\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
+\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax
+% store the nominal value of jot
+\newdimen\IEEEnormaljot
+\IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax
+
+% set \jot
+\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax
+
+
+
+
+% V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing
+% The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a
+% nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em)
+% a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%.
+% For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of:
+%
+% 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt
+%
+% However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need
+% for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE
+% tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words.
+% IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be:
+% 35% nominal
+% 23% minimum
+% 50% maximum
+% (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.)
+%
+% for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more:
+% 37.5% nominal
+% 23% minimum
+% 55% maximum
+
+% here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use
+% for medium (normal weight)
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35}
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23}
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50}
+
+% for bold
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375}
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23}
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55}
+
+
+% command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX:
+% \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space
+% \fontdimen3 = interword stretch
+% \fontdimen4 = interword shrink
+% since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands
+% in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes
+\def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{%
+\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead.
+\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
+\fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
+\fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
+\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
+\fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}}
+
+% revise the interword spacing for each font weight
+\def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
+\mdseries
+\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}%
+\bfseries
+\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}%
+}}
+
+% revise the interword spacing for each font shape
+% \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are
+% already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we
+% won't alter these either.
+\def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
+\normalfont
+\@@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\normalfont\itshape
+\@@IEEEsetfontdimens
+}}
+
+% command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape
+% and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a
+% fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers.
+\def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily
+\tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\small\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\large\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}}
+
+% if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing
+% now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make
+% sure all the default fonts are loaded
+\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else
+\@IEEEtunefonts
+\fi
+
+% and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts
+\AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi}
+
+
+
+% V1.6
+% LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations
+% So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise
+% the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox
+% warning. The author may still have to tweak things,
+% but the appearance will be much better "right out
+% of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior.
+% TeX default is 50
+\hyphenpenalty=750
+% If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better.
+% The TeX default is 1000
+\hbadness=1350
+% IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation
+\frenchspacing
+
+% V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks
+\binoppenalty=1000 % default 700
+\relpenalty=800     % default 500
+
+
+% margin note stuff
+\marginparsep      10pt
+\marginparwidth    20pt
+\marginparpush     25pt
+
+
+% if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch
+\lineskip            0pt
+\normallineskip      0pt
+\lineskiplimit       0pt
+\normallineskiplimit 0pt
+
+% The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the
+% footline
+\footskip 0.4in
+
+% normally zero, should be relative to font height.
+% put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes)
+\parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex
+
+\parindent    1.0em
+
+\topmargin    -49.0pt
+\headheight   12pt
+\headsep      0.25in
+
+% use the normal font baselineskip
+% so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch
+\topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
+\textheight       58pc  % 9.63in, 696pt
+% Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
+% The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used
+% to determine these values.
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi      % 63 lines/page
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi       % 58 lines/page
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 52 lines/page
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 50 lines/page
+
+
+\columnsep         1pc
+\textwidth        43pc   % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc
+
+
+% the default side margins are equal
+\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper
+\oddsidemargin        14.32mm
+\evensidemargin       14.32mm
+\else
+\oddsidemargin        0.680in
+\evensidemargin       0.680in
+\fi
+% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset
+\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
+
+
+
+% adjust margins for conference mode
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+ \topmargin        -0.25in
+ % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers
+ \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
+ \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
+ \textheight        9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt)
+ % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi      % 61 lines/page
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=56\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi       % 56 lines/page
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 50 lines/page
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 48 lines/page
+\fi
+
+
+% compsoc conference
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+ % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep
+ \columnsep 0.375in
+ % compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin
+ \topmargin        0in
+ \addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff
+ % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers
+ \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
+ \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
+ \textheight        8.875in % (641.39625pt)
+ % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi      % 58 lines/page
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=53\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi       % 53 lines/page
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 48 lines/page
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 46 lines/page
+ \textwidth 6.5in
+ % the default side margins are equal
+ \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper
+  \oddsidemargin        22.45mm
+  \evensidemargin       22.45mm
+ \else
+  \oddsidemargin        1in
+  \evensidemargin       1in
+ \fi
+ % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset
+ \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+ \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
+\fi\fi
+
+
+
+% draft mode settings override that of all other modes
+% provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra
+% space between the lines for editor's comments
+\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+  % want 1in from top of paper to text
+  \setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}%
+  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}%
+  % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type
+  \oddsidemargin      0in
+  \evensidemargin     0in
+  % set the text width
+  \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}%
+  \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}%
+  \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}%
+  \addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}%
+  % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines.
+  % this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad
+  \addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}%
+  \divide\textheight  by \baselineskip%
+  \multiply\textheight  by \baselineskip%
+  \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}%
+\fi
+
+
+
+% process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin
+% if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner.
+\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
+\else
+  \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
+    \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
+\else
+  % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer.
+  \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
+    \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
+  \fi
+  \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
+  \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside
+    \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
+  \else
+    \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
+  \fi
+  \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+  \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
+  \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}
+  \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
+  \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
+  \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and
+           outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
+\fi
+
+
+
+% process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin
+% if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin
+\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
+\else
+  \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
+    \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
+\else
+  % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin
+  \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
+    \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
+  \fi
+  \setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
+  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in}
+  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
+  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
+  \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}
+  \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
+  \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
+  % in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip
+  % we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need
+  % an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will
+  % correct for both.
+  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
+  \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and
+           bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
+\fi
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+% LIST SPACING CONTROLS
+
+% Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing
+% above and below \trivlist
+% Both \list and IED lists override this.
+% However, \trivlist will use this as will most
+% things built from \trivlist like the \center
+% environment.
+\topsep           0.5\baselineskip
+
+% Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded
+% or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase
+% spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero.
+% \z@ is the same as zero, but faster.
+\partopsep          \z@
+
+% Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists.
+% IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs
+% so this is also zero.
+% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to
+% this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists).
+\parsep             \z@
+
+% Controls the extra spacing between list items.
+% IEEE does not put extra spacing between items.
+% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect
+% lists (but not IED lists).
+\itemsep            \z@
+
+% \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list
+% item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter
+% it, you have to do so when you call the \list.
+% However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment
+% There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below
+\itemindent         -1em
+
+% \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to
+% the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list.
+% Hence this statement does nothing for lists.
+% But, quote and verse do use it for indention.
+\leftmargin         2em
+
+% we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list
+% will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and
+% description (IED) could care less about what these are as they
+% all are overridden.
+\leftmargini        2em
+%\itemindent         2em  % Alternative values: sometimes used.
+%\leftmargini        0em
+\leftmarginii       1em
+\leftmarginiii    1.5em
+\leftmarginiv     1.5em
+\leftmarginv      1.0em
+\leftmarginvi     1.0em
+\labelsep         0.5em
+\labelwidth         \z@
+
+
+% The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained.
+% However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the
+% @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the
+% appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called).
+% \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around
+% lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list.
+% Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in
+% the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes
+% of these values DO affect \list
 %
+\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
+\let\@listI\@listi
+\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii%
+    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii%
+    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
+\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv%
+    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
+\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv%
+    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
+\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi%
+    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
+
+
+% IEEE uses 5) not 5.
+\def\labelenumi{\theenumi)}     \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
+
+% IEEE uses a) not (a)
+\def\labelenumii{\theenumii)}  \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
+
+% IEEE uses iii) not iii.
+\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}
+
+% IEEE uses A) not A.
+\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)}   \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}
+
+% exactly the same as in article.cls
+\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
+\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
+\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
+
+% itemized list label styles
+\def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$}
+\def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}}
+\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$}
+\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$}
+
+
+
+% **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS ****
+% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls
+% ***************************
+%
+%
+% IEEE seems to use at least two different values by
+% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right
+% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal
+% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use
+% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications
+% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent.
+% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose
+% which one you like in your document using a command such as:
+% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB}
+\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA
+\IEEEilabelindentA \parindent
+
+\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB
+\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent
+% However, we'll default to using \parindent
+% which makes more sense to me
+\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent
+\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA
+
+
+% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels
+% are indented to the right.
+% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
+\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent
+\IEEEelabelindent \parindent
+
+% This controls the default amount the description list labels
+% are indented to the right.
+% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
+\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent
+\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent
+
+% This is the value actually used within the IED lists.
+% The IED environments automatically set its value to
+% one of the three values above, so global changes do
+% not have any effect
+\newdimen\IEEElabelindent
+\IEEElabelindent \parindent
+
+% The actual amount labels will be indented is
+% \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below
+% corresponding to the level of nesting depth
+% This provides a means by which the user can
+% alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper
+% levels
+% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE"
+% values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific
+% circumstances.
+% The first list level almost always has full indention.
+% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation
+% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing
+% that they don't use any indentation.
+\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0}   % almost always one
+\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases
+\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0?
+\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0}
+\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0}
+\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0}
+
+% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto
+% set to one of the 6 values above
+% global changes here have no effect
+\def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0}
+
+% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
+% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for
+% the labels.
+\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep
+\IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em
+
+% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
+% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for
+% the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the
+% spacing in these cases
+\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep
+\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em
+
+% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and
+% below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing
+% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable.
+\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep
+\IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
+
+
+% This command is executed within each IED list environment
+% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the
+% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing
+% global parameters that affect things other than lists.
+% i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}}
+% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until
+% \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined.
+\def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax}
+
+% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based
+% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent
+% Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label}
+% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively:
+% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep
+% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
+\def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}%
+\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}}
+
+% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the
+% width of the given text. It is the same as
+% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text}
+% and useful as a shorter alternative.
+% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width
+% of the longest label in the list
+\def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}}
+
+% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the
+% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal
+% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via
+% the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
+% environments.
+\def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}}
+
+% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically
+% calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep
+% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin
+% This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse)
+% via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
+% environments to have an effect.
+\newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin
+\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse
+
+% A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by
+% the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level.
+% This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option
+% of the IED list environments to have an effect.
+\newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor
+\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse
+
+
+% internal variable to indicate type of IED label
+% justification
+% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right
+\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}
+
+
+% commands to allow the user to control IED
+% label justifications. Use these commands within
+% the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl
+% Note that changing the normal list justifications
+% is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so!
+% I include these commands as they may be helpful to
+% those who are using these enhanced list controls for
+% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work.
+% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right
+% justification, description defaults to left.
+\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left
+\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center
+\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right
+
+
+
+
+% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies
+% this allows us to set all the list parameters within
+% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list)
+% from overriding any of our parameters
+% V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers
+% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
+\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}%
+\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}%
+\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}%
+\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}%
+\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}%
+\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}%
+\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}%
+\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}%
+\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}%
+\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}}
+
+% Note controlled spacing here
+\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax%
+\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax%
+\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax%
+\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax%
+\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax%
+\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax%
+\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax%
+\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax%
+\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax%
+\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax}
+
+
+% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments
+% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description
+% which must be created by the base classes
+% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate
+\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize
+\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize
+\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate
+\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate
+
+% provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls
+\newenvironment{LaTeXdescription}
+               {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
+                        \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}
+               {\endlist}
+\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep
+                                 \normalfont\bfseries #1}
+
+
+% override LaTeX's default IED lists
+\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize}
+\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
+\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
+\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
+\def\description{\@IEEEdescription}
+\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
+
+% provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that
+% override itemize, enumerate, or description
+\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize}
+\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
+\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
+\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
+\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription}
+\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
+
+
+% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal
+% commands so they are protected against redefinition
+\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}}
+\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}}
+\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}}
+\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist}
+\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist}
+\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist}
+
+
+% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
+% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
+% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001
+% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
+\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{%
+                \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
+                \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
+                \advance\@itemdepth\@ne%
+                \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
+                % get the labelindentfactor for this level
+                \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
+                \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
+                \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
+                \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
+                % set other defaults
+                \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
+                \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
+                \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
+                \IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent%
+                \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
+                \partopsep 0ex%
+                \parsep 0ex%
+                \itemsep 0ex%
+                \rightmargin 0em%
+                \listparindent 0em%
+                \itemindent 0em%
+                % calculate the label width
+                % the user can override this later if
+                % they specified a \labelwidth
+                \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}%
+                \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
+                \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{%
+                \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
+                                       % to our globals
+                \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
+                \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
+                #1\relax%
+                % If the user has requested not to use the
+                % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent
+                \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
+                \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\labelindent%
+                \fi%
+                % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
+                % calculate our left margin based
+                % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
+                % \labelsep
+                \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
+                \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
+                \fi}\fi\fi}%
+
+
+% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
+% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
+% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001
+% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
+\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{%
+                \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
+                \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
+                \advance\@enumdepth\@ne%
+                \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
+                % get the labelindentfactor for this level
+                \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
+                \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
+                \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
+                \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
+                % set other defaults
+                \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
+                \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
+                \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
+                \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent%
+                \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
+                \partopsep 0ex%
+                \parsep 0ex%
+                \itemsep 0ex%
+                \rightmargin 0em%
+                \listparindent 0em%
+                \itemindent 0em%
+                % calculate the label width
+                % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using
+                % normalfont 1) to 9)
+                % The user can override this later
+                \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}%
+                \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
+                \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}%
+                \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
+                                       % to our globals
+                \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
+                \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
+                #1\relax%
+                % If the user has requested not to use the
+                % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
+                \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
+                \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
+                \fi%
+                % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
+                % calculate our left margin based
+                % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
+                % \labelsep
+                \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
+                \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
+                \fi}\fi\fi}%
+
+
+% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
+% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
+% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001
+% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
+\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{%
+                \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
+                % get the labelindentfactor for this level
+                \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
+                \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
+                \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
+                \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default
+                % set other defaults
+                \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
+                \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
+                \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
+                \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent%
+                % assume normal labelsep
+                \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
+                \partopsep 0ex%
+                \parsep 0ex%
+                \itemsep 0ex%
+                \rightmargin 0em%
+                \listparindent 0em%
+                \itemindent 0em%
+                % Bogus label width in case the user forgets
+                % to set it.
+                % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you
+                % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to
+                % display it on the screen during compilation
+                % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out
+                % which label is the widest)
+                \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}%
+                \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
+                \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
+                                               % to our globals
+                \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
+                \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
+                #1\relax%
+                % If the user has requested not to use the
+                % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
+                \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
+                \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
+                \fi%
+                % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
+                % calculate our left margin based
+                % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
+                % \labelsep
+                \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
+                \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax%
+                \fi}\fi}
+
+% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed.
+\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax
+\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else
+\if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax
+\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else
+\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi}
+
+
+% VERSE and QUOTE
+% V1.7 define environments with newenvironment
+\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr
+    \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent
+    \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax}
+    {\endlist}
+\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent
+    \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax}
+    {\endlist}
+\newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax}
+    {\endlist}
+
+
+% \titlepage
+% provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct
+% way to create the title page.
+\newif\if@restonecol
+\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+    \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@}
+\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi}
+
+% standard values from article.cls
+\arraycolsep     5pt
+\arrayrulewidth .4pt
+\doublerulesep   2pt
+
+\tabcolsep       6pt
+\tabbingsep      0.5em
+
+
+%% FOOTNOTES
+%
+%\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+% V1.6 respond to changes in font size
+% space added above the footnotes (if present)
+\skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip  plus 0.4\baselineskip  minus 0.2\baselineskip
+
+% V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes
+% in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in
+% draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep
+% determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed
+% *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since
+% LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip
+% above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to
+% use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing
+% between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad
+% more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps
+% the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran
+% uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle.
+{\footnotesize
+\global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip}
+
+
+\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
+\fboxsep = 3pt
+\fboxrule = .4pt
+% V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark
+% Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need
+% box resizing tricks here.
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em
+% V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }}
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1}
+\fi
+
+% IEEE does not use footnote rules
+\def\footnoterule{}
+
+% V1.7 for compsoc, IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot"
+% system to implement this.
+\newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
+\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
+\kern-5pt
+\hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill}
+\kern4.6pt
+\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
+\else
+\relax
+\fi}
+\fi
+
+% V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages
+\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000
+
+% V1.6 discourage breaks within equations
+% Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000,
+% but LaTeX2e normally uses 100.
+\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500
+
+% default allows section depth up to /paragraph
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
+
+% technotes do not allow /paragraph
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
+   \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}
+\fi
+% neither do compsoc conferences
+\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}}
+
+
+\newcounter{section}
+\newcounter{subsection}[section]
+\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
+\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]
+
+% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may
+% have their own, different, implementations
+\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation]
+
+% as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents
+\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}}                          % 1
+\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}}  % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray)
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+% compsoc is all arabic
+\def\thesection{\arabic{section}}
+\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}
+\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}
+\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}
+\else
+\def\thesection{\Roman{section}}                             % I
+% V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around -
+\def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}}     % I-A
+% V1.7 use I-A1 format used by IEEE rather than I-A.1
+\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}}  % I-A1
+\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}}         % I-A1a
+\fi
+
+% From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to
+% tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks.
+% This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but
+% it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions.
+\@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}%
+\g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax}
+
+
+% Main text forms (how shown in main text headings)
+% V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes
+% in the former to automatically appear in the latter
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+  \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
+    \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.}
+    \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.}
+    \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.}
+    \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.}
+  \else% compsoc not conferencs
+    \def\thesectiondis{\thesection}
+    \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}}
+    \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}}
+    \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}}
+  \fi
+\else% not compsoc
+  \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.}                   % I.
+  \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.}          % B.
+  \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})}  % 3)
+  \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})}            % d)
+\fi
+
+% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum
+\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1)
+% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray
+\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a)
+% redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on
+% it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis
+\def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis}
+
+
+
+% V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does
+\def\contentsname{Contents}
+\def\listfigurename{List of Figures}
+\def\listtablename{List of Tables}
+\def\refname{References}
+\def\indexname{Index}
+\def\figurename{Fig.}
+\def\tablename{TABLE}
+\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}\def\tablename{Table}}
+\def\partname{Part}
+\def\appendixname{Appendix}
+\def\abstractname{Abstract}
+% IEEE specific names
+\def\IEEEkeywordsname{Keywords}
+\def\IEEEproofname{Proof}
+
+
+% LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS
+%
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
+\def\@tocrmarg{2.55em}
+\def\@dotsep{4.5}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
+
+% adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily
+% collide with the section titles.
+% VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders.
+% MDS 1/2001
+\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}}
+\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}%
+    \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth%
+    \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par%
+    \endgroup}
+% argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep
+\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}}
+\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}}
+% must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth
+% is such as they will not appear in the table of contents
+% these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are!
+\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}}
+\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}}
+\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}}
+\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}}
+\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}}
+\let\l@table\l@figure
+
+
+%% Definitions for floats
+%%
+%% Normal Floats
+\floatsep 1\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.2\baselineskip
+\textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.4\baselineskip
+\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
+\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
+\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
+\def\topfraction{0.9}
+\def\bottomfraction{0.4}
+\def\floatpagefraction{0.8}
+% V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page
+\def\textfraction{0.1}
+
+%% Double Column Floats
+\dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.2\baselineskip
+
+\dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.4\baselineskip
+% Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e.
+% There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best
+% of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable
+% portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and
+% do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with
+% underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex
+% by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998.
+% IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't
+% protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing.
+
+\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
+\@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
+\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
+\def\dbltopfraction{0.8}
+\def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8}
+\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4}
+
+\intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus  0.2\baselineskip
+\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
+
+
+
+% article class provides these, we should too.
+\newlength\abovecaptionskip
+\newlength\belowcaptionskip
+% but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table
+% captions
+\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip}
+\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt}
+% V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be
+% overridden by a user
+\def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
+\def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
+
+
+% 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments
+% as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref.
+\def\@IEEEtablestring{table}
+
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+% V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+% test if is a for a figure or table
+\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
+% if a table, do table caption
+\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}\end{center}%
+\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
+% if not a table, format it as a figure
+\else
+\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}%
+\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
+% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }%
+\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
+% if caption is shorter than a line, center
+\else%
+\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+\fi\fi}
+\else% nonconference compsoc
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+% test if is a for a figure or table
+\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
+% if a table, do table caption
+\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\end{center}%
+\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
+% if not a table, format it as a figure
+\else
+\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}%
+\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
+% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }%
+\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
+% if caption is shorter than a line, left justify
+\else%
+\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+\fi\fi}
+\fi
+
+\else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+% test if is a for a figure or table
+\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
+% if a table, do table caption
+\footnotesize\begin{center}{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\footnotesize\scshape #2}\end{center}%
+\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
+% if not a table, format it as a figure
+\else
+\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
+% 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ #2}%
+\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
+% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ }%
+\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
+% if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise
+\else%
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+\else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+\fi\fi\fi}
+\fi
+
+
+
+% V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label
+% within \caption
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\end{center}%
+\let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label
+\let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax
+\def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}%
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}%
+\let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave
+\ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi}
+\fi
+
+
+% V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with
+% preview-latex
+\newcounter{figure}
+\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}
+\def\fps@figure{tbp}
+\def\ftype@figure{1}
+\def\ext@figure{lof}
+\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure}
+\def\figure{\@float{figure}}
+\def\endfigure{\end@float}
+\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}}
+\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}
+\newcounter{table}
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\def\thetable{\arabic{table}}
+\else
+\def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table}
+\fi
+\def\fps@table{tbp}
+\def\ftype@table{2}
+\def\ext@table{lot}
+\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable}
+% V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables
+% to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray
+\def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}}
+\def\endtable{\end@float}
+% v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well.
+\@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}}
+\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}
+
+
+
+
+%%
+%% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS
+%%
+%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX
+%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett,
+%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum,
+%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding.
+%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;)
+
+
+% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting
+\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}}
+
+\newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form
+\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse
+
+\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter
+% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray
+% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both
+\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue
+
+\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined
+\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt  % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used
+
+
+% The default math style used by the columns
+\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle}
+% The default text style used by the columns
+% default to using the current font
+\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax}
+
+% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray
+\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax}
+\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax}
+
+% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber
+% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package
+% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as
+% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else.
+\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue}
+\def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue}
+\def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse}
+
+
+\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue%
+\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray
+\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi%
+\def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi}
+
+% flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation
+\newif\if@IEEEissubequation%
+\@IEEEissubequationfalse
+
+% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers
+\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}}
+
+% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments
+% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the
+% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text}
+\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}%
+% check if column is defined
+\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
+\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
+\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname%
+\else% if not, error and use default type
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak
+Using a default centering column instead}%
+{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
+\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
+\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname%
+\fi%
+% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi}
+
+% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray
+\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi}
+
+
+% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text}
+\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}%
+\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}%
+\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}}
+
+
+% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition}
+\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}%
+\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}}
+
+
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types
+
+
+% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list
+% used to build up the \halign preamble
+\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}%
+\@@IEEEappendtoksA}
+
+% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument
+% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register
+\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}%
+\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}%
+\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA}
+
+% define some common column types for the user
+% math
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$}
+% text
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{}
+
+% vertical rules
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}%
+{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
+
+% horizontal rules
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil}
+
+% plain
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$}
+
+% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
+
+
+% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types)
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}
+% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types)
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt}
+
+% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column
+% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
+
+
+
+% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell
+% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way.
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness]
+% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness.
+\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax}
+
+% creates a blank separator row
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands]
+% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
+% blank arguments inherit the default values
+% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
+\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}}
+\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
+% get the skip value, based on the font commands
+% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
+% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
+\else%
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
+\fi%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
+
+% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands]
+% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
+% blank arguments inherit the default values
+% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
+\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
+% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}}
+\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
+% get the skip value, based on the font commands
+% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
+% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
+\else%
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
+\fi%
+\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
+
+
+
+% draws a single rule across all the columns optional
+% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default
+% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness]
+\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
+% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule
+% turn off any struts
+\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
+
+
+% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then
+% another single rule row
+% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
+% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
+\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
+% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}%
+{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
+\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
+% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
+\else%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax%
+\fi%
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
+\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
+\else%
+\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]%
+\fi%
+\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
+% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
+\else%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
+\fi%
+}
+
+% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then
+% another single rule row
+% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
+% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
+\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
+% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}%
+{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
+\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
+% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
+\else%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
+\fi%
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
+\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
+\else%
+\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]%
+\fi%
+\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
+% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
+\else%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
+\fi%
+}
+
+
+
+% inserts a full row's worth of &'s
+% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns
+% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax%
+\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
+\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax%
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
+\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count
+\repeat%
+\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s
+}
+
+
+
+\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines
+\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse    % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl
+
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt}
+
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt}  % struts within an IEEEeqnarray
+
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth
+
+\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value
+\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue     % is to be used
+
+
+
+% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax%
+\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
+\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
+% remove stretchability
+\dimen0\skip0\relax%
+\dimen2\skip2\relax%
+% save values
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}}
+
+% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax%
+\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax%
+\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax%
+% remove stretchability
+\dimen0\skip0\relax%
+\dimen2\skip2\relax%
+% restore values
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}}
+
+
+% globally restores the strut height and depth to the
+% master values and sets the master strut flag to true
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax%
+\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
+\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
+% remove stretchability
+\dimen0\skip0\relax%
+\dimen2\skip2\relax%
+% restore values
+\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
+\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue}
+
+
+% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current
+% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth
+% and the use master strut flag, global
+% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried
+% into the isolation/strut column
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax%
+\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else%
+\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}%
+\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}%
+\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse%
+\fi}
+
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands]
+% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height
+% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside
+% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut
+% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut
+% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip
+% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively.
+% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
+% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
+% font is used.
+% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
+\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}%
+\skip0=\skip3\relax%
+\else% arg one present
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}%
+\skip0=\skip3\relax%
+\fi% if null arg
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}%
+\skip2=\skip3\relax%
+\else% arg two present
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}%
+\skip2=\skip3\relax%
+\fi% if null arg
+% remove stretchability, just to be safe
+\dimen0\skip0\relax%
+\dimen2\skip2\relax%
+% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
+\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
+\else% outer, have to set master strut too
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
+\fi}
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands]
+% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height
+% and depth to both the master and local struts.
+% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth
+% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use
+% of the local strut values.
+% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead.
+% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
+% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
+% font is used.
+% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
+\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
+\skip0=0pt\relax%
+\else% arg one present
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}%
+\skip0=\skip3\relax%
+\fi% if null arg
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
+\skip2=0pt\relax%
+\else% arg two present
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}%
+\skip2=\skip3\relax%
+\fi% if null arg
+% remove stretchability, just to be safe
+\dimen0\skip0\relax%
+\dimen2\skip2\relax%
+% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
+\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
+% get local strut size
+\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
+\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
+% add it to the user supplied values
+\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
+\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
+% update the local strut size
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
+\else% outer, have to set master strut too
+% get master strut size
+\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
+\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
+% add it to the user supplied values
+\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
+\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
+% update the local and master strut sizes
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
+\fi}
+
+
+% allow user a way to see the struts
+\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts
+\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse
+
+% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values
+% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax%
+\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut
+% get master strut size
+\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
+\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
+\else%
+% get local strut size
+\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
+\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
+\fi%
+% remove stretchability, probably not needed
+\dimen0\skip0\relax%
+\dimen2\skip2\relax%
+% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
+% allow user to see struts if desired
+\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
+\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
+\else%
+\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}
+
+
+% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray
+% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide.
+% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands]
+% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
+% blank arguments inherit the default values
+% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2
+\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}}
+\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}}
+\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}}
+\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax%
+\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}%
+\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
+\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax%
+\else%
+\skip0=#1\relax%
+\fi%
+\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}%
+\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
+\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax%
+\else%
+\skip2=#2\relax%
+\fi%
+% remove stretchability, probably not needed
+\dimen0\skip0\relax%
+\dimen2\skip2\relax%
+\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
+\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
+\else%
+\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}}
+
+
+% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the
+% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot
+\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]%
+\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt}
+
+
+
+\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray}
+\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
+
+\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray}
+\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
+
+
+% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray.
+% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row.
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}}
+\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{%
+   % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not
+   % the star form was involked
+   \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse
+   \else% not the star form
+   \global\@eqnswtrue
+   \fi% if star form
+   \@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations
+   \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation
+   \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign
+   \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
+   \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
+   \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
+   % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
+   \lineskip=0pt\relax
+   \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax
+   \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
+   \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
+   \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
+   \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses,
+                             % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
+   \stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line
+   \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet
+   \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label
+   \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
+   #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
+   \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers
+   \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line
+   \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
+   % put in the column for the equation number
+   \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
+   \toks0={##}%
+   % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking
+   \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
+   % add the isolation column
+   \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
+   % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking
+   \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
+   % add the equation number col to the preamble
+   \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}%
+   % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col
+   % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
+   \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
+   % begin the display alignment
+   \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
+   $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup
+   % "exspand" the preamble
+   \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
+
+% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use
+% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed,
+% restore counters to correct values and exit
+\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup%
+\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi%
+\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne%
+$$\@ignoretrue}
+
+% need a way to remember if last line is a subequation
+\newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation%
+\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse
+
+% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
+% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount]
+% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
+% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
+% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column
+% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column
+   {\ifnum0=`}\fi
+   \@ifstar{%
+      \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
+   }{%
+      \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
+   }%
+}
+
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip}
+
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{%
+   \ifnum0=`{\fi}%
+   \@@IEEEeqnarraycr
+   \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}%
+
+\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
+    \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column
+    \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
+    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak
+                          environment}%
+    {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak
+     specifications.}\relax%
+    \else
+    \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
+    \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
+    \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
+    \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count
+    \repeat
+    % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column
+    \fi
+    % execute the &'s
+    \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%
+    % handle the strut/isolation column
+    \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed
+    \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
+    &% and enter the equation number column
+    % is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the
+    % (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was
+    \if@eqnsw%
+     \if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}%
+     \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue%
+     \else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter
+     \theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}%
+     \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi%
+    \fi%
+    % reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers
+    \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi
+    \global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag
+    % reset the number of columns the user actually used
+    \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax
+    % the real end of the line
+    \cr}
+
+
+
+
+
+% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything
+% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second
+% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray,
+% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested.
+% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox
+% within an hbox.
+% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within
+% a \hbox{$ $} construct.
+% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or
+% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode.
+% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to -
+% natural width is the default.
+% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols}
+\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+
+\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+
+\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
+\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+
+\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
+\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+
+% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $}
+% for \vcenter in non-math mode
+\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse
+
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}}
+\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}}
+\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}}
+
+% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs
+\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign
+   \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values
+   \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
+   \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
+   \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
+   % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
+   \lineskip=0pt\relax%
+   \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
+   \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
+   \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
+   \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
+   % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox
+   \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue
+   \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue
+   \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
+   \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses,
+                              % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
+   \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
+   #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
+   \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing
+   \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
+   % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col
+   \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
+   \toks0={##}%
+   % add the isolation column to the preamble
+   \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
+   % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
+   \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
+   % begin the alignment
+   \everycr{}%
+   % use only the very first token to determine the positioning
+   % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter,
+   % but is probably not worth the effort
+   % \noindent is used as a delimiter
+   \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
+   \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent
+   % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
+   % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now
+   \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi%
+   % use the appropriate vbox type
+   \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax%
+   \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup%
+   \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
+   \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi%
+   \bgroup
+   % "exspand" the preamble
+   \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
+
+% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column,
+% exit from math mode if needed, and exit
+\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
+&% enter isolation/strut column
+\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
+\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values
+% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray
+% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values)
+\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
+% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
+\crcr\egroup\egroup%
+% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed
+\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi}
+
+
+
+% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
+% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount]
+% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
+% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\
+% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
+% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column
+% carry strut status into isolation/strut column
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
+&% enter isolation/strut column
+\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
+% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
+\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
+{\ifnum0=`}\fi%
+\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}}
+
+% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip}
+
+% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
+\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}}
+
+
+
+% starts the halign preamble build
+\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
+\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known
+\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start
+\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known
+% ensure these are valid
+\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}%
+\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition
+% currently acquired numerically referenced glue
+% use a name that is easier to remember
+\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
+\@IEEEBPcurnum=0%
+% tracks number of columns in the preamble
+\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0%
+% record the default end glues
+\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}%
+\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}%
+% now parse the user's column specifications
+\@@IEEEbuildpreamble}
+
+
+% parses and builds the halign preamble
+\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble%
+% use only the very first token to check the end
+% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
+\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
+\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
+\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else%
+% identify current and next token type
+\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid
+\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next
+% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def
+\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi%
+% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name
+\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi%
+% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue
+\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi%
+% process the acquired glue
+\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi%
+% process the acquired col
+\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi%
+% ready prevtype for next col spec.
+\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype%
+% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group
+\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}}
+
+
+% executed just after preamble build is completed
+% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue
+\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}%
+{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}%
+\fi%num cols less than 1
+%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue
+\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi}
+
+
+% Identify and return the column specifier's type code
+\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{%
+% use only the very first token to determine the type
+% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
+\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
+\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
+% \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
+% n = number
+% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12)
+% c = letter
+% e = \end
+% u = undefined
+% third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char
+\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise
+\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else
+\ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences
+\if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax
+\else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\if#2u\relax
+\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}%
+{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak
+as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi}
+
+
+% identify the current letter referenced column
+% if invalid, use a default column
+\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
+\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak
+Using a default centering column instead}%
+{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
+\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi}
+
+
+% identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value
+\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{%
+% ! = \! (neg small)  -0.16667em (-3/18 em)
+% , = \, (small)       0.16667em ( 3/18 em)
+% : = \: (med)         0.22222em ( 4/18 em)
+% ; = \; (large)       0.27778em ( 5/18 em)
+% ' = \quad            1em
+% " = \qquad           2em
+% . = 0.5\arraycolsep
+% / = \arraycolsep
+% ? = 2\arraycolsep
+% * = 1fil
+% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter
+% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero
+% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6
+% value for 1em.
+%
+% use only the very first token to determine the type
+% this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text
+% \noindent is used as a delimiter here
+\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
+\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
+% get the math font 1em value
+% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs
+% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters.
+% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure
+% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done,
+% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work.
+% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic.
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}%
+% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad).
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax%
+% identify the glue value based on the first token
+% we discard anything after the first
+\if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else
+\if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else
+\if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else
+\if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else
+\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak
+column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
+0pt instead}%
+{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak
+IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+
+
+
+% process a numerical digit from the column specification
+% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value
+% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired
+\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
+specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
+after the first}%
+{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak
+in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
+\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded
+\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%
+\else% if we previously aborted a glue
+\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion
+\else%acquire this number
+% save the previous type before the numerical digits started
+\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi%
+\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax%
+\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan
+\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition
+\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
+\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}%
+\else%user glue not defined
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak
+column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
+0pt instead}%
+{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak
+\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}%
+\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
+\fi% glue defined or not
+\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue
+\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue
+\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition
+\fi%close acquisition, get glue
+\fi%discard or acquire number
+\fi%prevtype glue or not
+}
+
+
+% process an acquired glue
+% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble
+\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions
+\else
+% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else
+% as this is not used in the preamble, but before
+\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
+\else%not the start glue
+\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
+specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
+after the first}%
+{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak
+in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
+\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
+\else% not a back to back glue
+\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble
+\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi
+\toks0={##}%
+% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
+% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand
+% the column definition
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
+\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
+\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
+\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
+\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak
+type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak
+specifier}%
+{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak
+between column types.}%
+\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
+\fi% previous was a column
+\fi% back-to-back glues
+\fi% is start column glue
+\fi% prev type not a
+}
+
+
+% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble
+\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else
+\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else
+% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue)
+% so we must add this column to the preamble now
+\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first
+\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue
+\toks0={##}%
+% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
+% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand
+% the column definition
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
+\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
+\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
+\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
+\fi%next type not numeral
+\fi%next type not glue
+}
+
+
+%%
+%% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS
 %%
+
+
+
+
+% set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different
+% modes IEEEtran supports
+\if@twoside
+ \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
+   \def\ps@headings{%
+       \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
+       \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
+       \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+            \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
+               \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
+            \else
+               \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT}
+               \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date}
+            \fi
+       \else
+            \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}
+       \fi}
+ \else % not a technote
+   \def\ps@headings{%
+       \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+        \def\@oddhead{}
+        \def\@evenhead{}
+       \else
+        \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage}
+        \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
+       \fi
+       \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+            \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage}
+            \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
+            \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
+               \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
+            \else
+               \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT}
+               \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date}
+            \fi
+       \else
+            \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
+       \fi}
+ \fi
+\else % single side
+\def\ps@headings{%
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+     \def\@oddhead{}
+     \def\@evenhead{}
+    \else
+     \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
+     \def\@evenhead{}
+    \fi
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+          \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
+          \def\@evenhead{}
+          \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
+             \def\@oddfoot{}
+          \else
+             \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date \hfil DRAFT}
+          \fi
+    \else
+         \def\@oddfoot{}
+    \fi
+    \def\@evenfoot{}}
+\fi
+
+
+% title page style
+\def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+   \def\@oddhead{}%
+   \def\@evenhead{}%
+\else
+   \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}%
+   \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}%
+\fi
+\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+   \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}%
+   \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}%
+   \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
+      \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}%
+      \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}%
+   \fi
+\else
+   % all non-draft mode footers
+   \if@IEEEusingpubid
+      % for title pages that are using a pubid
+      % do not repeat pubid if using peer review option
+      \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
+      \else
+         \footskip 0pt%
+         \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+           \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+           \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+         \else
+           \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+           \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+         \fi
+      \fi
+   \fi
+\fi}
+
+
+% peer review cover page style
+\def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{%
+\def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}%
+\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
+\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+   \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
+      \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}%
+      \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}%
+   \fi
+\else
+   % non-draft mode footers
+   \if@IEEEusingpubid
+      \footskip 0pt%
+      \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+        \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+        \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+      \else
+        \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+        \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+      \fi
+   \fi
+\fi}
+
+
+% start with empty headings
+\def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{}
+
+
+%% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same
+%% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}.
+%% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text
+%% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually
+%% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the
+%% arguments to \markboth.
+\def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#1}}%
+\def\rightmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#2}}}
+\def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}}
+
+\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
+    January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+    July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+    \space\number\day, \number\year}
+
+
+
+
+%% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS
 %%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
-%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
-%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
-%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
-%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
-%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
-%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
-%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
-%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
-%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
-%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
-\ProvidesClass{aa}[2006/06/01 v6.1
-^^JLaTeX document class for Astronomy and Astrophysics journal]
-\newcommand\@ptsize{}
-\newif\if@restonecol
-\newif\if@titlepage
-\@titlepagefalse
-\newif\if@longauth
-\@longauthfalse
-\newif\if@online
-\@onlinefalse
-\newif\if@rnote
-\@rnotefalse
-\newif\if@oldversion
-\@oldversionfalse
-\newif\if@letter
-\@letterfalse
-
-%
-\DeclareOption{a4paper}
-   {\setlength\paperheight {297mm}%
-    \setlength\paperwidth  {210mm}}
-\DeclareOption{letterpaper}
-   {\setlength\paperheight {11in}%
-    \setlength\paperwidth  {8.5in}}
-\DeclareOption{legalpaper}
-   {\setlength\paperheight {14in}%
-    \setlength\paperwidth  {8.5in}}
-\DeclareOption{10pt}{\renewcommand\@ptsize{0}}
-\DeclareOption{11pt}{\renewcommand\@ptsize{1}}
-\DeclareOption{12pt}{\renewcommand\@ptsize{2}}
-\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue  \@mparswitchtrue}
-\DeclareOption{draft}{\setlength\overfullrule{5pt}}
-\DeclareOption{final}{\setlength\overfullrule{0pt}}
-\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\@twocolumntrue}
-\DeclareOption{leqno}{\input{leqno.clo}}
-\DeclareOption{fleqn}{\input{fleqn.clo}}
-\DeclareOption{openbib}{%
-  \AtEndOfPackage{%
-   \renewcommand\@openbib@code{%
-      \advance\leftmargin\bibindent
-      \itemindent -\bibindent
-      \listparindent \itemindent
-      \parsep \z@
-      }%
-   \renewcommand\newblock{\par}}%
-}
-%
-\DeclareOption{longauth}{\@longauthtrue}
-\DeclareOption{rnote}{\@rnotetrue}
-\DeclareOption{oldversion}{\@oldversiontrue}
-%% January 2008 - abstract
-\DeclareOption{tradiabstract}{\@oldversiontrue}
-\DeclareOption{structabstract}{\@oldversionfalse}
-\DeclareOption{letter}{\@lettertrue}
-%
-\let\if@runhead\iffalse
-\DeclareOption{runningheads}{\let\if@runhead\iftrue}
-\let\if@envcntreset\iffalse
-\DeclareOption{envcountreset}{\let\if@envcntreset\iftrue}
-\let\if@envcntsect\iffalse
-\DeclareOption{envcountsect}{\let\if@envcntsect\iftrue}
-\let\if@referee\iffalse
-\DeclareOption{referee}{\let\if@referee\iftrue}
-\let\if@onecolumn\iffalse
-\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\let\if@onecolumn\iftrue}
-\let\if@nyobjects\iffalse
+%% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff
 %
-\ExecuteOptions{a4paper,twoside,twocolumn,fleqn,final,10pt,runningheads}
-\ProcessOptions
-\AtEndOfClass{\mathindent\z@}
-%
-\if\@ptsize 0
-%
-   \renewcommand\normalsize{%
-      \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt{11}%
-      \abovedisplayskip 8.55\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus5\p@
-      \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
-      \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
-      \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-      \let\@listi\@listI}
-   \normalsize
-   \newcommand\small{%
-      \@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{10}%
-      \abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
-      \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@
-      \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
-      \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
-                  \parsep 0\p@ \@plus1\p@ \@minus\p@
-                  \topsep 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
-                  \itemsep0\p@}%
-      \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-   }
-   \newcommand\scriptsize{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt\@viiipt}
-   \newcommand\tiny{\@setfontsize\tiny\@viiipt\@ixpt}
-   \newcommand\large{\@setfontsize\large\@xipt{13}}
-   \newcommand\Large{\@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{16}}
-   \newcommand\LARGE{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{20}}
-   \newcommand\huge{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{24}}
-   \newcommand\Huge{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30}}
-   %
-   \setlength\parindent{15\p@}
-   \setlength\smallskipamount{3\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
-   \setlength\medskipamount{6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
-   \setlength\bigskipamount{12\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
-   \setlength\headheight{12\p@}
-   \setlength\headsep   {12\p@} %
-   \setlength\topskip   {10\p@}
-   \setlength\footskip{30\p@}
-   \setlength\maxdepth{.5\topskip}
-   %
-   \@settopoint\textwidth
-   \setlength\marginparsep {10\p@}
-   \setlength\marginparpush{5\p@}
-   \setlength\oddsidemargin   {-30\p@}
-   \setlength\evensidemargin  {-30\p@}
-   \setlength\marginparwidth  {48\p@}
-   \setlength\topmargin{-40pt}
-   \setlength\footnotesep{8\p@}
-   \setlength{\skip\footins}{9\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
-   \setlength\floatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
-   \setlength\textfloatsep{18\p@ \@plus 8\p@ \@minus 6\p@}
-   \setlength\intextsep   {18\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
-   \setlength\dblfloatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
-   \setlength\dbltextfloatsep{18\p@ \@plus 8\p@ \@minus 6\p@}
-   \setlength\@fptop{0\p@ }
-   \setlength\@fpsep{12\p@ }
-   \setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
-   \setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ }
-   \setlength\@dblfpsep{12\p@ }
-   \setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
-   \setlength\partopsep{2\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
-   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
-               \parsep \z@
-               \topsep 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
-               \itemsep\parsep}
-   \let\@listI\@listi
-   \@listi
-   \def\@listii {\leftmargin\leftmarginii
-                 \labelwidth\leftmarginii
-                 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-                 \topsep    \z@
-                 \parsep    \topsep
-                 \itemsep   \parsep}
-   \def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
-                 \labelwidth\leftmarginiii
-                 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-                 \topsep    \z@
-                 \parsep    \topsep
-                 \itemsep   \parsep}
-   \def\@listiv {\leftmargin\leftmarginiv
-                 \labelwidth\leftmarginiv
-                 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
-   \def\@listv  {\leftmargin\leftmarginv
-                 \labelwidth\leftmarginv
-                 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
-   \def\@listvi {\leftmargin\leftmarginvi
-                 \labelwidth\leftmarginvi
-                 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
-\else
-   \input{size1\@ptsize.clo}
-\fi
-%
-\let\footnotesize\small
-%
-\setlength{\textwidth}{184mm}
-\setlength{\textheight}{705pt}
-%
-\setlength\lineskip{1\p@}
-\setlength\normallineskip{1\p@}
-\renewcommand\baselinestretch{}
-\setlength\parskip{0\p@ \@plus \p@}
-\@lowpenalty   51
-\@medpenalty  151
-\@highpenalty 301
-%
-\setcounter{topnumber}{4}
-\renewcommand\topfraction{.9}
-\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
-\renewcommand\bottomfraction{.5}
-\setcounter{totalnumber}{6}
-\renewcommand\textfraction{.05}
-\renewcommand\floatpagefraction{.95}
-\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{3}
-\renewcommand\dbltopfraction{.9}
-\renewcommand\dblfloatpagefraction{.95}
 %
-\def\ps@headings{%
-    \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
-    \def\@evenhead{\small\rlap{\thepage}\hfil\leftmark\hfil}%
-    \def\@oddhead{\small\hfil\rightmark\hfil\llap{\thepage}}%
-    \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
-    \let\sectionmark\@gobble
-    \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
-    }
-% make indentations changeable
-\def\setitemindent#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}%
-        \leftmargini\labelwidth
-        \advance\leftmargini\labelsep
-   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
-        \labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth by -\labelsep
-        \parsep=\parskip
-        \topsep=\medskipamount
-        \itemsep=\parskip \advance\itemsep by -\parsep}}
-\def\setitemitemindent#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}%
-        \leftmarginii\labelwidth
-        \advance\leftmarginii\labelsep
-\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
-        \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth by -\labelsep
-        \parsep=\parskip
-        \topsep=\z@
-        \itemsep=\parskip \advance\itemsep by -\parsep}}
-% labels of description
-\def\descriptionlabel#1{\hspace\labelsep #1\hfil}
-% adjusted environment "description"
-% if an optional parameter (at the first two levels of lists)
-% is present, its width is considered to be the widest mark
-% throughout the current list.
-\def\description{\@ifnextchar[{\@describe}{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@
-          \itemindent-\leftmargin \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}}
-\let\enddescription\endlist
-%
-\def\describelabel#1{#1\hfil}
-\def\@describe[#1]{\relax\ifnum\@listdepth=0
-\setitemindent{#1}\else\ifnum\@listdepth=1
-\setitemitemindent{#1}\fi\fi
-\list{--}{\let\makelabel\describelabel}}
-%
-\newdimen\logodepth
-\logodepth=1.3cm
-\newdimen\headerboxheight
-\headerboxheight=143pt
-\newdimen\betweenumberspace          % dimension for space between
-\betweenumberspace=3.33pt            % number and text of titles.
-\newdimen\aftertext                  % dimension for space after
-\aftertext=5pt                       % text of title.
-\newdimen\headlineindent             % dimension for space between
-\headlineindent=1.166cm              % number and text of headings.
-\def\andname{and}
-\def\keywordname{Key words.}
-\def\lastandname{, and}
-\def\mailname{{\it Correspondence to\/}:}
-\def\email#1{{e-mail: \tt#1}}
-% Used only by the publisher
-\def\AASection#1{}
-%
-\newcounter{inst}
-\newcounter{auth}
-\newdimen\instindent
-\newbox\authrun
-\newtoks\authorrunning
-\newbox\titrun
-\newtoks\titlerunning
-
-\def\journalname#1{\gdef\@journalname{#1}}
-\gdef\@journalname{Astronomy \&\ Astrophysics}
-
-\def\headnote#1{\gdef\@headnote{#1}}
-\def\@headnote{}
-
-\def\dedication#1{\gdef\@dedic{#1}}
-\def\@dedic{}
-
-\let\@date\undefined
-
-\if@oldversion
-\long\def\abstract#1{\gdef\@abstract{#1}}
-\else
-\long\def\abstract#1#2#3#4#5{\gdef\@abstract{\number@fw@rds=0%
-         \if!#1!\advance\number@fw@rds-1 \else{\sffamily\itshape Context.}\ \pickupw@rd#1\\\let\WC@go\relax\fi
-         {\sffamily\itshape Aims.}\
-         \if!#2! \@latex@error{The second heading "Aims" is mandatory in the abstract}{}
-           {\it The second heading "Aims" is mandatory in the abstract}\\
-           \else\advance\number@fw@rds+1\pickupw@rd#2\\\let\WC@go\relax\fi
-         {\sffamily\itshape Methods.}\
-         \if!#3! \@latex@error{The third heading "Methods" is mandatory in the abstract}{}
-           {\it The third heading "Methods" is mandatory in the abstract}\\
-           \else\advance\number@fw@rds+1\pickupw@rd#3\\\let\WC@go\relax\fi
-         {\sffamily\itshape Results.}\
-         \if!#4! \@latex@error{The forth heading "Results" is mandatory in the abstract}{}
-           {\it The forth heading "Results" is mandatory in the abstract}\\
-            \else\advance\number@fw@rds+1\pickupw@rd#4\let\WC@go\relax\fi
-         \if!#5! \else\\\advance\number@fw@rds+1{\sffamily\itshape Conclusions.}\ \pickupw@rd#5\let\WC@go\relax\fi
-         \ifnum\number@fw@rds>400
-         \@latex@error{Around \number\number@fw@rds\space words in the abstract instead of 300}{}
-         \else\relax\fi}}
-\fi
-
-\def\keywords#1{\gdef\@keywords{#1}}
-%% January 2007
-\def\topics#1{\gdef\@topics{#1}}
-\def\@topics{}
+% Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], ["
+\def\@citex[#1]#2{%
+  \let\@citea\@empty
+  \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do
+    {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}%
+     \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}%
+     \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
+     \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%
+       \G@refundefinedtrue
+       \@latex@warning
+         {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%
+       {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}}
+
+% V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's
+% cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the
+% following format controls are already defined and will not
+% redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the
+% citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" -
+% all in IEEE style:  [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12]
+% This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}.
+% If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will
+% be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally
+% desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in
+% that \cite.
+% Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments
+% to produce the IEEE style.
+\def\citepunct{], [}
+\def\citedash{]--[}
+
+% V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty
+\AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname}

+% V1.6 class files should always provide these
+\def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
+\let\@openbib@code\@empty

-\def\institute#1{\gdef\@institute{#1}}

-\def\institutename{\par
- \begingroup
- \parindent=0pt
- \parskip=0pt
- \setcounter{inst}{1}%
- \def\and{\par\stepcounter{inst}%
- \hangindent\instindent
- \noindent
- \hbox to\instindent{\hss$^{\theinst}$\enspace}\ignorespaces}%
- \setbox0=\vbox{\def\thanks##1{}\@institute}
- \ifnum\value{inst}>9\relax\setbox0=\hbox{$^{88}$\enspace}%
-                 \else\setbox0=\hbox{$^{8}$\enspace}\fi
- \instindent=\wd0\relax
- \ifnum\value{inst}=1\relax
+% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later.
+% V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in
+% order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty:
+% \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature}
+% \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak}
+\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}}
+\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack
+  \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%
+    \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+    \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}%
+  \@esphack}
+
+% V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before
+% a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance
+% the columns on the last page
+\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0}   % the default of zero means that
+                              % the command is not executed
+\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage}
+
+% allow the user to alter the triggered command
+\long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}}
+
+% allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the
+% command is executed
+\def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1%
+\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}%
+
+% trigger command at the given reference
+\def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax%
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax%
+\ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi}
+
+
+\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]}
+
+% compsoc journals left align the reference numbers
+\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}}
+
+% controls bib item spacing
+\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt}
+
+\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}}
+
+
+\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}%
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}%
+    % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger
+    \footnotesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\small}\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip%
+    \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
+    {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
+    \leftmargin\labelwidth
+    \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax
+    \itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax
+    \usecounter{enumiv}%
+    \let\p@enumiv\@empty
+    \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
+    \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem%
+    \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}%
+\def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}%
+% originally:
+%   \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000%
+% by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more
+% difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference.
+% IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with
+% technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography,
+% but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish.
+% MDS 11/2000
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100%
+\else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi%
+    \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}
+\let\endthebibliography=\endlist
+
+
+
+
+% TITLE PAGE COMMANDS
+%
+%
+% \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author
+% IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font
+\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}}
+
+
+% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation.
+% When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote
+% symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{}
+% reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you
+% cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote
+% symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks.
+% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical
+% height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that
+% the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding
+% with the text above.
+% V1.7 make this a robust command
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or%
+    \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger%
+    \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}}
+
+
+% FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS
+%
+% The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}
+% The default if the user does not use an author block
+\def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}
+
+% spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode)
+% can be negative
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em}
+% compsoc conferences need more space here
+\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}}
+
+% spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
+% This can be negative.
+% IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these
+% controls in place in case they ever change their mind.
+% Personally, I like 0.75ex.
+%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex}
+%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex}
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex}
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex}
+% baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
+% must be positive, spacings below certain values will make
+% the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the
+% line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders,
+% subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep
+% these above 2.6ex
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex}
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex}
+
+% This tracks the required strut size.
+% See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used.
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}
+
+% variables to retain font size and style across groups
+% values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later
+\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10}
+\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12}
+\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1}
+\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm}
+\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m}
+\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n}
+
+% saves the current font attributes
+\def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size%
+\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip%
+\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding%
+\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family%
+\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series%
+\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape}
+
+% restores the saved font attributes
+\def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}%
+\fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}%
+\fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}%
+\fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}%
+\fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}%
+\selectfont}
+
+
+% variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column
+\newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol   \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse
+
+
+% the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace
+% we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines
+% within the halign environment.
+% We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above
+% baseline portion at 70% of the total length.
+% Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch
+\def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace%
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
+\rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}}
+
+
+% blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations.
+% Makes formatting easy for conferences
+%
+% use real definitions in conference mode
+% name block
+\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style
+\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row
+% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
+% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
+% do a spacer row if needed
+\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi
+\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
+%restore the correct strut value
+\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}%
+% input the author names
+#1%
+% end the row if the user did not already
+\crcr}
+% spacer row for names
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}}
+%
+% affiliation block
+\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style
+\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row
+% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
+% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
+% do a spacer row if needed
+\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi
+\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
+%restore the correct strut value
+\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}%
+% input the author affiliations
+#1%
+% end the row if the user did not already
+\crcr}
+% spacer row for affiliations
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}}
+
+
+% allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other
+% than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks.
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
  \else
-   \setcounter{inst}{1}%
-   \hangindent\instindent
-   \noindent
-   \hbox to\instindent{\hss$^{\theinst}$\enspace}\ignorespaces
+   \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else
+      % not conference or peerreviewca mode
+      \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}%
+      \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}%
+   \fi
  \fi
- \small
- \ignorespaces
- \@institute\par
- \endgroup}

-\def\offprints#1{\begingroup
-\def\protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand}\xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
-\protect\footnotetext[0]{\unskip\hskip-1.5em{\it Send offprint requests
-to\/}: \ignorespaces#1}}\endgroup\ignorespaces}
-
-\def\mail#1{\gdef\@mail{#1}}
-\def\@mail{}
-
-\def\@thanks{}
-
-\def\@fnsymbol#1{\ifcase#1\or\star\or{\star\star}\or{\star\star\star}%
-   \or \dagger\or \ddagger\or
-   \mathchar "278\or \mathchar "27B\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger
-   \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi\relax}
-
-\def\inst#1{\unskip$^{#1}$}
-\def\fnmsep{\unskip$^,$}
-
-\def\subtitle#1{\gdef\@subtitle{#1}}
-\def\@subtitle{}
-
-\def\msnr#1{\gdef\@msnr{#1}}
-\def\@msnr{}
-
-\def\idline#1#2{\gdef\@idline{#1}\setcounter{page}{#2}}
-\def\@idline{}
-\def\doi#1{\gdef\@doi{DOI: 10.1051/0004-6361:#1}}
-\def\@doi{(DOI: will be inserted by hand later)}
-
-\def\headnote#1{\gdef\@headnote{#1}}
-\def\@headnote{}
-
-\def\ch@ckobl#1#2{\@ifundefined{@#1}
- {\typeout{A\string&A warning: Missing
-\expandafter\string\csname#1\endcsname}%
-  \csname #1\endcsname{#2}}
- {}}
-
-\def\ch@ckoblabs#1#2#3#4#5#6{\@ifundefined{@#1}
- {\typeout{A\string&A warning: Missing
-\expandafter\string\csname#1\endcsname}%
-  \csname #1\endcsname{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}
- {}}
-
-\newif\if@normhead \@normheadtrue
-\def\hugehead{\@normheadfalse
-\onecolumn
-\let\thanks=\footnote
-\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent\bibindent
-     \columnwidth\textwidth\advance\columnwidth -\columnsep
-     \divide\columnwidth\tw@\hsize\columnwidth \linewidth\columnwidth
-     \noindent\hbox to\parindent{\hss$\m@th^{\@thefnmark}$ }##1}%
-}

-\newcommand\errorref{\@latex@error{Citations are not allowed in the abstract}{}}
-\newenvironment{stopref}{\let\cite\errorref\let\citet\errorref\let\citep\errorref}{}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% This counts the words. This is an extract of  "gvol.sty,
-% written by Ivan Andrus (gvol@math.byu.edu)
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-  \newcount\number@fw@rds
-  \long\def\pickupw@rd#1 {%
-    \let\WC@go\pickupw@rd #1
-    \advance\number@fw@rds+1
-    \expandafter\WC@go
-   }
-% End of wordcount section

-\def\maketitle{\par
-\ch@ckobl{journalname}{Noname}
-\ch@ckobl{date}{Preprint online version: \today}
-\ch@ckobl{title}{A title should be given}
-\ch@ckobl{author}{Name(s) and initial(s) of author(s) should be given}
-\ch@ckobl{institute}{Address(es) of author(s) should be given}
-\if@oldversion
-\ch@ckobl{abstract}{An abstract should be given}
+% we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular
+\def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style
+   \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing
+   \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
+   \baselineskip=0pt\relax%
+   \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font
+   \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
+   \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one
+   \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing
+   \everycr{}% ensure no problems here
+   \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet
+   \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space
+   \vtop\bgroup%vtop box
+   \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax
+   \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr}
+
+% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
+\def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup}
+
+% handle bogus star form
+\def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}}
+
+% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
+\def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip}
+
+% end the line and do the optional spacer
+\def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}}
+
+
+
+% flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNand
+\@IEEEWARNandtrue
+
+% if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a
+% tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid
+% outside of conference or peerreviewca modes.
+\def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override
+
+\renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only
+                               when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse}
+
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
+\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
+\fi
+\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
+\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
+\fi
+
+
+% page clearing command
+% based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles
+% for the inserted blank pages
+\def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else
+\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
+
+
+% user command to invoke the title page
+\def\maketitle{\par%
+  \begingroup%
+  \normalfont%
+  \def\thefootnote{}%  the \thanks{} mark type is empty
+  \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author
+  \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well.
+  \footnotesize%       equal spacing between thanks lines
+  \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info
+  % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc
+  \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}%
+  \normalsize%
+  \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
+     \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
+     \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks%
+  \else
+     \if@twocolumn%
+        \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
+           \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
 \else
-\ch@ckoblabs{abstract}{An abstract should be given}{An abstract should be given}
-{An abstract should be given}{An abstract should be given}{An abstract should be given}
+           \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\@IEEEaftertitletext]%
 \fi
-\ch@ckobl{keywords}{Keywords should be given}
-\begingroup
-    \begin{stopref}
-    \renewcommand\thefootnote{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}%
-    \def\@makefnmark{$^{\@thefnmark}$}%
- \def\lastand{\ifnum\value{inst}=2\relax
-                 \unskip{} \andname\
-              \else
-                 \unskip, \andname\
-              \fi}%
- \def\and{\stepcounter{auth}\relax
-          \ifnum\value{auth}=\value{inst}%
-             \lastand
-          \else
-             \unskip,
-          \fi}%
- \ifnum \col@number=\@ne
-   \@maketitle
- \else
-   \twocolumn[\@maketitle]%
- \fi
- \thispagestyle{empty}
- \global\@topnum\z@
- \if@normhead
-    \@thanks
- \else
-    \twocolumn[\vspace{\@tempdima}]
-    \addtocounter{page}{-1}
-    \if!\the\authorrunning!
-       \authorrunning{ }%
-    \fi
- \fi
- \if!\@mail!\else
-    \footnotetext[0]{\kern-\bibindent\mailname\
-    \ignorespaces\@mail}%
- \fi
-%
- \if@runhead
-    \def\\{\unskip\ \ignorespaces}\def\inst##1{\unskip{}}%
-    \def\thanks##1{\unskip{}}\def\fnmsep{\unskip}%
-    \def\object##1{##1}%
-    \instindent=\textwidth
-    \advance\instindent by-2\headlineindent
-    \if!\the\titlerunning!\else
-      \edef\@title{\the\titlerunning}%
-    \fi
-    \global\setbox\titrun=\hbox{\small\rm\unboldmath\ignorespaces\@title}%
-    \ifdim\wd\titrun>\instindent
-       \typeout{^^JA\string&A Warning: Title too long for running head.}%
-       \typeout{Please supply a shorter form with \string\titlerunning
-                \space prior to \string\maketitle}%
-       \global\setbox\titrun=\hbox{\small\rm
-       Title Suppressed Due to Excessive Length}%
-    \fi
-    \xdef\@title{\copy\titrun}%
-%
-    \if!\the\authorrunning!
-    \else
-      \setcounter{auth}{1}%
-      \edef\@author{\the\authorrunning}%
-    \fi
-    \ifnum\value{auth}>2
-       \def\stripauthor##1\and##2\endauthor{%
-       \protected@xdef\@author{##1\unskip\unskip\if!##2!\else
-       \ et al.\fi}}%
-       \expandafter\stripauthor\@author\and\endauthor
-    \else
-       \gdef\and{\unskip\ and \ignorespaces}%
-       {\def\and{\noexpand\protect\noexpand\and}%
-       \protected@xdef\@author{\@author}}
-    \fi
-    \global\setbox\authrun=\hbox{\small\unboldmath\@author\unskip:
-                                 \unhbox\titrun\if@rnote~\itshape\rnotname\fi}%
-    \ifdim\wd\authrun>\instindent
-    \typeout{^^JA\string&A Warning: The running head built automatically
-             from \string\author\space and \string\title
-             ^^Jexceeds the pagewidth, please supply a shorter form
-             ^^Jwith \string\authorrunning\space and/or
-             \string\titlerunning\space prior to \string\maketitle}%
-    \global\setbox\authrun=\hbox{\small\rm Please give a shorter version
-       with: {\tt\string\authorrunning\space}and/or{\tt\space
-       \string\titilerunning\space}prior to{\tt\space\string\maketitle}}%
+     \else
+        \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
     \fi
-    \xdef\@author{\copy\authrun}%
-    \markboth{\@author}{\@author}%
+     \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks%
+  \fi
+  % pullup page for pubid if used.
+  \if@IEEEusingpubid
+     \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}%
  \fi
-%
- \end{stopref}
  \endgroup
- \setcounter{footnote}{0}
- \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
- \global\let\thanks\relax
- \global\let\maketitle\relax
- \global\let\@maketitle\relax
- \global\let\@thanks\@empty
- \global\let\@author\@empty
- \global\let\@date\@empty
- \global\let\@title\@empty
- \global\let\@subtitle\@empty
- \global\let\@abstract\@empty
-%%January 2007
- \global\let\@topics\@empty
- \global\let\@keywords\@empty
- \global\let\keywords\relax
- \global\let\title\relax
- \global\let\author\relax
- \global\let\abstract\relax
- \global\let\date\relax
- \global\let\and\relax}
-
-\def\AALogo{\setbox254=\hbox{
-\setlength{\tabcolsep}{0pt}
-\begin{tabular}{l}
-\\[-30pt]
-{\fontsize{18}{21}\selectfont\sffamily\bfseries Astronomy} \\[-2.5pt]
-{\fontsize{16}{12}\selectfont\sffamily\mdseries \kern8pt\&\raisebox{4pt}{\rule{78pt}{1pt}}} \\[-5pt]
-{\fontsize{18}{21}\selectfont\sffamily\bfseries Astrophysics}
-\end{tabular}}\copy254}
-
-\def\makeheadbox{{
-\hbox to\textwidth{%
-\if!\@idline!
-\hbox to0pt{\vbox{\hsize=40cc
-\baselineskip=12pt\hrule\hbox
-{\vrule\kern3pt\vbox{\kern3pt
-\hb@xt@ 40cc{{\sl\@journalname}\ manuscript no.~\jobname \hfill\copyright~ESO~\the\year}
-\if!\@msnr!\hbox{\today}\else
-\hb@xt@ 30cc{\hfil\strut\LARGE\bfseries\smash{\@msnr}}\fi
-\kern3pt}\hfil\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}\hss}\hfill
-\else
-\vbox{\baselineskip=11pt
-\hbox{\@idline}
-\hbox{\@doi}
-\hbox{\small\rm \copyright~ESO~\the\year}}
-\hfill\AALogo
-\fi}}}
+  \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax
+  \gdef\@thanks{}%
+  % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers
+  % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}%
+  \let\thanks\relax}
+
+

+% V1.7 parbox to format \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext
+\long\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}}
+
+% formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice
+% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional
+% spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line
 \def\@maketitle{\newpage
- \normalfont
- \vbox to0pt{\vskip-20pt
- \nointerlineskip
- \makeheadbox\vss}\nointerlineskip
- \if@normhead
-    \setbox\authrun=\vbox\bgroup
- \fi
-%% January 2007
- \if!\@topics!\vskip32pt\else
- \vskip24pt
- {\fontsize{12}{14}\selectfont\sffamily {\itshape \@topics} \hfill \fontsize{17}{20}\selectfont\sffamily Special feature}
- \vskip12pt
- \fi
- \begin{center}
-%% Januray 2007
-%% \vskip24pt
- \if@letter{\large \lettername}\fi
- {\LARGE \sffamily\bfseries\boldmath
-  \hrule\@height\logodepth\@width\z@
-  \pretolerance=10000
-  \vspace*{-12pt}
-  \pretolerance=10000
- \if!\@headnote!\else
-   \noindent
-   {\normalfont\itshape\ignorespaces\@headnote\par}\vskip 3.5mm
+\begin{center}%
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes
+   {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@author
+   \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
+   \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par
+   \hfill\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
+\else% not a technote
+   \vskip0.2em{\Huge\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
+   \bfseries\Large}\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par%
+   % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode
+   \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
+      {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
+       \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax
+   \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal
+      \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
+         % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode
+         {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
+          \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par
+          {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
+           \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill
+           \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
+      \else% journal or peerreview
+         {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par
+          {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
+           \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill
+           \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
+      \fi
+   \fi
+\fi\end{center}}
+
+
+
+% V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers
+\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}%
+\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}%
+\hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax}
+
+% V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def
+% We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule
+\def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue}
+
+
+\long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark
+    \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
+        \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape
+        \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}}
+\let\@thanks\@empty
+
+% V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par.
+\long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}}
+
+
+% in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and
+% below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts.
+\def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}%
+\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
+\setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax}
+
+
+% flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item
+\newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse
+
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+% V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks
+% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace
+\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark
+    \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
+        \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule
+        {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax
+        \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item}
+\else
+% non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks
+\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}}
+% redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[]
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}%
+{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}}
+% be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument
+\def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break
+\indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces}
  \fi
-  \noindent\ignorespaces
-  \@title
-  \if@rnote \\ \itshape \rnotename \fi
-  \par}
- \vskip 8pt\relax
- \if!\@subtitle!\else
-   {\Large \sffamily\bfseries\boldmath
-   \pretolerance=10000
-   \noindent\ignorespaces\@subtitle \par}\vskip 10pt
- \fi
-%% \lineskip .5em
- \setbox0=\vbox{\setcounter{auth}{1}\def\and{\stepcounter{auth} }%
-                \hfuzz=2\textwidth\def\thanks##1{}\@author}%
- \value{inst}=\value{auth}%
- \setcounter{auth}{1}%
- {\large \rmfamily\mdseries \noindent\ignorespaces\@author}
- \if@longauth \else \end{center} \fi
- \vskip6pt
-\small\rm
- \if@longauth {\it (Affiliations can be found after the references)}  \else
- \leftskip=.8cm\rightskip=\leftskip
- \institutename\fi
- \vskip 8pt \noindent\@date
- \if!\@dedic!\else
-    \par
-    \normalsize\it
-    \addvspace\baselineskip
-    \noindent\@dedic
- \fi
- \if@longauth \end{center} \fi
- \vskip 8pt
- \small\rm
- \if!\@abstract!\else
-  \begin{center}
-   {\sffamily\bfseries\abstractname}\par
-  \end{center}
-  \@abstract
- \fi
- \vskip 6pt
- \small\rm
- \if!\@keywords!\else
- \noindent{\sffamily\bfseries\keywordname}\ \@keywords
- \fi
-%
- \if@normhead
-    \egroup % end of header box
-    \@tempdima=\headerboxheight
-    \advance\@tempdima by-\ht\authrun
-%   \advance\@tempdima by-\pagetotal
-    \ifdim\@tempdima>0pt
-       \vrule width0pt height\@tempdima
-    \fi
-    \unvbox\authrun
-    \global\@minipagetrue
-    \global\everypar{\global\@minipagefalse\global\everypar{}}
- \else
-    \typeout{\the\c@auth\space author names and}
-    \typeout{\the\c@inst\space institutes processed}
-    \global\@tempdima=\pagetotal
-    \global\advance\@tempdima by24pt
+
+
+% V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed
+\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
+\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}%
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
+\twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace]
+\else
+\newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip
  \fi
- \vskip24pt
-}
-%
-\DeclareMathAlphabet{\mathsc}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sc}
-\def\testbx{bx}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\ion}[2]{%
-\relax\ifmmode
-\ifx\testbx\f@series
-{\mathbf{#1\,\mathsc{#2}}}\else
-{\mathrm{#1\,\mathsc{#2}}}\fi
-\else\textup{#1\,{\mdseries\textsc{#2}}}%
-\fi}
-%
-\def\clearelargs{\def\1{}\def\2{}\def\3{}\def\4{}\count255=0}
-\def\druck@lement#1{{}^{\2}_{\3}\mathrm{#1}{}^{\1}_{\4}{}\if@tempswa$\fi}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\element}{\relax\ifmmode\@tempswafalse
-\else$\@tempswatrue\fi\clearelargs\def\?{\phantom{0}}\@lement}
-\def\@lement#1{\if#1[\expandafter\f@@dargs\else\druck@lement{#1}\fi}
-\def\f@@dargs#1]{\advance\count255by\@ne
-\expandafter\def\csname\number\count255\endcsname{#1}\@lement}
-%
-%\def\vec#1{\ensuremath{\mathbf{#1}}}
-\def\vec#1{\ensuremath{\mathchoice{\mbox{\boldmath$\displaystyle#1$}}
-{\mbox{\boldmath$\textstyle#1$}}
-{\mbox{\boldmath$\scriptstyle#1$}}
-{\mbox{\boldmath$\scriptscriptstyle#1$}}}}
-%
-\def\tens#1{\ensuremath{\mathsf{#1}}}
-%
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}
-\newcounter {section}
-\newcounter {subsection}[section]
-\newcounter {subsubsection}[subsection]
-\newcounter {paragraph}[subsubsection]
-\newcounter {subparagraph}[paragraph]
-\renewcommand\thesection      {\@arabic\c@section}
-\renewcommand\thesubsection   {\thesection.\@arabic\c@subsection}
-\renewcommand\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection .\@arabic\c@subsubsection}
-\renewcommand\theparagraph    {\thesubsubsection.\@arabic\c@paragraph}
-\renewcommand\thesubparagraph {\theparagraph.\@arabic\c@subparagraph}
-%
-\def\sectcounterend{.}
+\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}}
+\else
+% \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected
+\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax}
+\fi
+
+% peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers.
+\def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}%
+\normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par
+\end{center}}
+
+
+
+% V1.6
+% this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text
+% used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column
+% of two column text (technotes).
+\def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize
+% adjust spacing to next text
+% v1.6b handle peer review papers
+\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
+% for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages
+% regardless of the other paper modes
+   \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip
+\else
+   \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference
+      \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
+   \else%
+      \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote
+         \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
+      \else% journal uses more space
+         \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip%
+      \fi
+   \fi
+\fi}}
+
+
+% V1.6
+% This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors
+% and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two
+% column text (most common)
+% This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the
+% main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip
+% otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the
+% text on the titlepage
+% The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account.
+\def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{%
+    % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done
+    \long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height
+    \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height
+    \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names
+    \let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns
+    \let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines
+    % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer
+    % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to
+    % become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be
+    % lengthened
+    % default to journal values
+    \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}%
+    \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}%
+    % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference
+     \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%
+     \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%
+    \fi
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote
+      \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%
+      \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%
+    \fi%
+    % get the height that the title will take up
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
+       \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}%
+    \else
+       \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}%
+    \fi
+    \@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign
+    % add the height of the page textheight
+    \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight%
+    % correct for title pages using pubid
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
+       % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only.
+       % And the cover page uses a static spacer.
+       \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi
+    \fi%
+    % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer
+    \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace%
+    % \topskip takes away some too
+    \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip%
+    % calculate the column height of the main text for lines
+    % now we calculate the main text height as if holding
+    % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first
+    % and discard any excess fractional remainder
+    % we subtracted the first line, because the first line
+    % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the
+    % rest of the lines.
+    \@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight%
+    \divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight  by \baselineskip%
+    \multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight  by \baselineskip%
+    % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will
+    % have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always
+    % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer
+    % number of normal size lines
+    % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer
+    % need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register
+    \let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight%
+    \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight%
+    \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip%
+    % this is the calculated height of the spacer
+    % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer
+    % need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register
+    \let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight%
+    \@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value
+    % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase
+    \ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax%
+     \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%
+     % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead
+     \ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax%
+      \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%
+     \fi%
+    \else%
+     % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease
+     \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%
+     \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%
+    \fi%
+    % set the calculated rigid spacer
+    \vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}}
+
+
+
+% V1.6
+% we allow the user access to the last part of the title area
+% useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed
+% This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer.
+\let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax
+\long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}}
+
+% V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords
+% into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for
+% in the dynamic sizer.
+\let\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext=\relax
+\long\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{#1}}
+% V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext if
+% not in compsoc journal mode - this way abstract and keywords can be placed
+% in their conventional position if not in compsoc mode.
+\def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{%
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if compsoc conf
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi
+\else% or if not compsoc
+\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi}
+
+
+% command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current
+% baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing.
+\def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont
+\global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip%
+\def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax}
+
+
+% abstract and keywords are in \small, except
+% for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize
+% Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small
+% becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt
+\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
+ \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}
+\fi
+
+% compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize
+\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}}
+\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}}
+
+
+
+
+% V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines
+% so that spacing is more tightly controlled.
+\def\abstract{\normalfont
+    \if@twocolumn
+      %\@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\abstractname}---\relax
+      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\textit{\abstractname}---\relax
+    \else
+      \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
+    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
+% V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in
+% conference mode (the heading already has this much above it)
+\def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi
+    \normalfont\normalsize}
+
+\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont
+    \if@twocolumn
+      %\@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
+      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
+    \else
+      \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
+    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
+\def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi
+    \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi%
+    \normalfont\normalsize}
+
+% V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+  \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
+\def\abstract{\normalfont
+      \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip
+      \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
+      \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
+\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip
+      \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip
+      \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
+      \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
+  \else% compsoc not conference
+\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax
+    \else
+      \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
+    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
+\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent
+      \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
+    \else
+      \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
+    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+
+
+% gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that
+% is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token
+%
+% used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input
+% so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not
+% affect the formatting of the text
+\long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0%
+\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1%
+\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par%
+\let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\%
+\let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ %
+\def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }%
+\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken%
+\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
+\fi%
+\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken%
+\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
+\fi%
+\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken%
+\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
+\fi%
+% a control space will come in as a macro
+% when it is the last one on a line
+\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO%
+\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
+\fi%
+% if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one
+% else spit it out and stop gobbling
+\ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else%
+\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi%
+\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}%
+

-\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname\sectcounterend
-\hskip\betweenumberspace}

+
+% TITLING OF SECTIONS
+\def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,}  % Punctuation after run-in section heading  (headings which are
+                            % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space
+                            % spacing from section number to title
+% compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+\def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ }
+\fi\fi
+
+
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax}
+
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+% compsoc journals need extra spacing
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax}
+\fi\fi
+
+%v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control
+%and use \@@par rather than \par
 \def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
   \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
     \let\@svsec\@empty
   \else
     \refstepcounter{#1}%
+     % load section label and spacer into \@svsec
     \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
-  \fi
+  \fi%
   \@tempskipa #5\relax
-  \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
-    \begingroup
-      #6{%
-        \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
-          \raggedright
-          \hyphenpenalty \@M%
-          \interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}%
+  \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high
+     \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading
+      \noindent % subsections are NOT indented
+       % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title
+       % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
+       {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}%
     \endgroup
-    \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
-    \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
-      \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
-        \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
-      \fi
-      #7}%
-  \else
-    \def\@svsechd{%
-      #6{\hskip #3\relax
-      \@svsec #8\hskip\aftertext}%
-      \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
-      \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
-        \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
-          \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
-        \fi
-        #7}}%
-  \fi
+     \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
+               \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}%
+  \else % printout low level headings
+     % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
+     % got rid of sectionmark stuff
+     \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}%
+     \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
+               \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}%
+  \fi%skip down
   \@xsect{#5}}

-%
-% measures and setting of sections
-%
-\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}%
-    {-16dd plus-4pt minus-4pt}{6dd}{\large\sffamily\bfseries}}
-\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}%
-    {-16dd}{6dd}{\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}
-\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}%
-    {-16dd}{6dd}{\normalsize\sffamily}}
-\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}%
-    {-16dd}{-1pt}{\normalsize\sffamily}}
-
-\setlength\leftmargini  {\parindent}
-\leftmargin  \leftmargini
-\setlength\leftmarginii {\parindent}
-\setlength\leftmarginiii {1.87em}
-\setlength\leftmarginiv  {1.7em}
-\setlength\leftmarginv  {.5em}
-\setlength\leftmarginvi {.5em}
-\setlength  \labelsep  {.5em}
-\setlength  \labelwidth{\leftmargini}
-\addtolength\labelwidth{-\labelsep}
-\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
-\@endparpenalty   -\@lowpenalty
-\@itempenalty     -\@lowpenalty
-\renewcommand\theenumi{\@arabic\c@enumi}
-\renewcommand\theenumii{\@alph\c@enumii}
-\renewcommand\theenumiii{\@roman\c@enumiii}
-\renewcommand\theenumiv{\@Alph\c@enumiv}
-\newcommand\labelenumi{\theenumi.}
-\newcommand\labelenumii{(\theenumii)}
-\newcommand\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.}
-\newcommand\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.}
-\renewcommand\p@enumii{\theenumi}
-\renewcommand\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
-\renewcommand\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
-\newcommand\labelitemi{\normalfont\bfseries --}
-\newcommand\labelitemii{\normalfont\bfseries --}
-\newcommand\labelitemiii{$\m@th\bullet$}
-\newcommand\labelitemiv{$\m@th\cdot$}
-
-% redefinition of the "\newtheorem" command.
-%
-% Usage now:
-%
-%     \newtheorem{env_nam}{caption}[within]{cap_font}{body_font}
-% or  \newtheorem{env_nam}[numbered_like]{caption}{cap_font}{body_font}
-% or  \newtheorem*{env_nam}{caption}{cap_font}{body_font}
-%
-% New is "cap_font" and "body_font". It stands for
-% fontdefinition of the caption and the text itself.
-%
-% "\newtheorem*" gives a theorem without number.
-%
-% A defined newthoerem environment is used as described
-% by Lamport.
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\def\@thmcountersep{}
-\def\@thmcounterend{.}
-
-\def\newtheorem{\@ifstar{\@sthm}{\@Sthm}}
-
-% definition of \newtheorem with number
-
-\def\@Sthm#1{\@ifnextchar[{\@othm{#1}}{\@nthm{#1}}}
-
-\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]#4#5{\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
-   {\@definecounter{#1}\@addtoreset{#1}{#3}%
-   \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\expandafter\noexpand
-     \csname the#3\endcsname \noexpand\@thmcountersep \@thmcounter{#1}}%
-   \expandafter\xdef\csname #1name\endcsname{#2}%
-   \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{\csname #1name\endcsname}{#4}{#5}}%
-                              \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
-
-\def\@ynthm#1#2#3#4{\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
-   {\@definecounter{#1}%
-   \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\@thmcounter{#1}}%
-   \expandafter\xdef\csname #1name\endcsname{#2}%
-   \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{\csname #1name\endcsname}{#3}{#4}}%
-                               \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
-
-\def\@othm#1[#2]#3#4#5{%
-  \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\@latexerr{No theorem environment `#2'
-  defined}\@eha}%
-  {\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
-  {\global\@namedef{the#1}{\@nameuse{the#2}}%
-  \expandafter\xdef\csname #1name\endcsname{#3}%
-  \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#2}{\csname #1name\endcsname}{#4}{#5}}%
-  \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}}

-\def\@thm#1#2#3#4{\refstepcounter
-    {#1}\@ifnextchar[{\@ythm{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}{\@xthm{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}}
+% section* handler
+%v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control
+%and use \@@par rather than \par
+\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax
+  \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+     %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup
+     % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
+     \begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup
+  % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
+  \else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi
+  \@xsect{#3}}

-\def\@xthm#1#2#3#4{\@begintheorem{#2}{\csname the#1\endcsname}{#3}{#4}%
-                    \ignorespaces}

-\def\@ythm#1#2#3#4[#5]{\@opargbegintheorem{#2}{\csname
-       the#1\endcsname}{#5}{#3}{#4}\ignorespaces}
+%% SECTION heading spacing and font
+%%
+% arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name
+% (for \@sect)   #2 - section level
+%                #3 - section heading indent
+%                #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text)
+%                     If negative, make stretch parts negative too!
+%                #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading,
+%                      negative: amount to indent main text after heading
+%                Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation
+%                #6 - font control
+% You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent
+% trouble when you do something like:
+% \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ...
+% IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section
+% heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good
+% idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber.
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
+% IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode
+\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
+{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
+\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
+{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
+\else % for journals
+\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex
+{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
+\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}%
+{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
+\fi
+
+% for both journals and conferences
+% decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody
+\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
+{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
+\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
+{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
+
+
+% compsoc
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+% compsoc conference
+\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
+{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}%
+\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
+{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}%
+\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
+{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
+\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
+{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
+\else% compsoc journals
+% use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles
+\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}%
+{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}%
+% Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society,
+% I have to look up an example.
+\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}%
+{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}%
+\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}%
+{0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}%
+\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}%
+{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
+\fi\fi

-\def\@begintheorem#1#2#3#4{\trivlist
-                 \item[\hskip\labelsep{#3#1\ #2\@thmcounterend}]#4}

-\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3#4#5{\trivlist
-      \item[\hskip\labelsep{#4#1\ #2\ (#3)\@thmcounterend}]#5}

-% definition of \newtheorem* without number

-\def\@sthm#1#2{\@Ynthm{#1}{#2}}
+%% ENVIRONMENTS
+% "box" symbols at end of proofs
+\def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box
+% V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one
+\def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}}
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen}   % default to open for compsoc
+\else
+\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed
+\fi

-\def\@Ynthm#1#2#3#4{\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
-   {\global\@namedef{#1}{\@Thm{\csname #1name\endcsname}{#3}{#4}}%
-    \expandafter\xdef\csname #1name\endcsname{#2}%
+% v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support
+% for an optional argument.
+\def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}}
+\def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\par\noindent\hspace{2em}{\itshape #1: }}
+\def\endIEEEproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\IEEEQED\par}
+
+
+%\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable
+\newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent
+\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist%
+    \item[\hskip \labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2:}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent}
+\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist%
+% V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics
+% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this.
+    \item[\hskip\labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent}
+% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with
+% lines below.
+\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist}
+
+% V1.6
+% display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection
+% is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic.
+% LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number
+% (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator.
+% V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
+% to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed.
+%
+% special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override
+\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}}
+% string macro
+\edef\@IEEEstringsection{section}
+
+% redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
+% if section in_counter is used
+\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{%
+  \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
+    {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]%
+     \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3}
+     \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection
+     \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
+     \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep
+          \@thmcounter{#1}}%
+     \else
+     \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
+       \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep
+          \@thmcounter{#1}}%
+     \fi
+     \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}%
     \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}

-\def\@Thm#1#2#3{\@ifnextchar[{\@Ythm{#1}{#2}{#3}}{\@Xthm{#1}{#2}{#3}}}
-
-\def\@Xthm#1#2#3{\@Begintheorem{#1}{#2}{#3}\ignorespaces}

-\def\@Ythm#1#2#3[#4]{\@Opargbegintheorem{#1}
-       {#4}{#2}{#3}\ignorespaces}

-\def\@Begintheorem#1#2#3{#3\trivlist
-                           \item[\hskip\labelsep{#2#1\@thmcounterend}]}
-
-\def\@Opargbegintheorem#1#2#3#4{#4\trivlist
-      \item[\hskip\labelsep{#3#1\ (#2)\@thmcounterend}]}
-
-% definition of divers theorem environments
-
-\if@envcntsect
-   \def\@thmcountersep{.}
-   \newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section]{\bf}{\it}
-\else
-   \newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}{\bf}{\it}
-   \if@envcntreset
-      \@addtoreset{theorem}{section}
-   \else
-      \@addtoreset{theorem}{chapter}
-   \fi
-\fi
-\newtheorem*{proof}{Proof}{\it}{\rm}
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary}{\bf}{\it}
-\newtheorem{definition}[theorem]{Definition}{\bf}{\rm}
-\newtheorem{example}[theorem]{Example}{\it}{\rm}
-\newtheorem{exercise}[theorem]{Exercise}{\it}{\rm}
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma}{\bf}{\it}
-\newtheorem{note}[theorem]{Note}{\it}{\rm}
-\newtheorem{problem}[theorem]{Problem}{\it}{\rm}
-\newtheorem{proposition}[theorem]{Proposition}{\bf}{\it}
-\newtheorem{question}[theorem]{Question}{\it}{\rm}
-\newtheorem{remark}[theorem]{Remark}{\it}{\rm}
-\newtheorem{solution}[theorem]{Solution}{\it}{\rm}
-
-\def\@takefromreset#1#2{%
-    \def\@tempa{#1}%
-    \let\@tempd\@elt
-    \def\@elt##1{%
-        \def\@tempb{##1}%
-        \ifx\@tempa\@tempb\else
-            \@addtoreset{##1}{#2}%
-        \fi}%
-    \expandafter\expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempc\csname cl@#2\endcsname
-    \expandafter\def\csname cl@#2\endcsname{}%
-    \@tempc
-    \let\@elt\@tempd}
-
-\def\theopargself{\def\@opargbegintheorem##1##2##3##4##5{\trivlist
-      \item[\hskip\labelsep{##4##1\ ##2\ ##3}]##5}
-                  \def\@Opargbegintheorem##1##2##3##4{##4\trivlist
-      \item[\hskip\labelsep{##3##1\ ##2}]}
-      }
+%% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE
+\ps@headings
+\pagenumbering{arabic}

-\def\squareforqed{\hbox{\rlap{$\sqcap$}$\sqcup$}}
-\def\qed{\ifmmode\else\unskip\quad\fi\squareforqed}
-%
-\newdimen\figgap\figgap=1cc
-\long\def\@makesidecaption#1#2{%
-   \parbox[b]{\@tempdima}{\captionstyle{\floatlegendstyle
-                                         #1\floatcounterend}~#2}}
-\def\sidecaption#1\caption{%
-\setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox{#1\unskip}%
-\if@twocolumn
- \ifdim\hsize<\textwidth\else
-   \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa<\columnwidth
-      \typeout{Double column float fits into single column -
-            ^^Jyou'd better switch the environment. }%
-   \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-\@tempdima=\hsize
-\advance\@tempdima by-\figgap
-\advance\@tempdima by-\wd\@tempboxa
-\ifdim\@tempdima<3cm
-    \typeout{\string\sidecaption: No sufficient room for the legend;
-             using normal \string\caption. }%
-   \unhbox\@tempboxa
-   \let\@capcommand=\@caption
-\else
-   \let\@capcommand=\@sidecaption
-   \leavevmode
-   \unhbox\@tempboxa
-   \hfill
-\fi
-\refstepcounter\@captype
-\@dblarg{\@capcommand\@captype}}
-
-\long\def\@sidecaption#1[#2]#3{\addcontentsline{\csname
-  ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}{\protect\numberline{\csname
-  the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}\begingroup
-    \@parboxrestore
-    \@makesidecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par
-  \endgroup}
-%
-% Online material
-\long\def\onlfig#1#2{\AtEndDocument{\Online\setcounter{figure}{#1}\addtocounter{figure}{-1}#2}\setcounter{figure}{#1}}
-\long\def\onltab#1#2{\AtEndDocument{\Online\setcounter{table}{#1}\addtocounter{table}{-1}#2}\setcounter{table}{#1}}
-\long\def\onllongtab#1#2{\AtEndDocument{\Online\setlength{\LTcapwidth}{\textwidth}\setcounter{table}{#1}%
-\addtocounter{table}{-1}\onecolumn#2\twocolumn}\setcounter{table}{#1}}
-\long\def\onllongtabL#1#2{\AtEndDocument{\Online\setlength{\LTcapwidth}{\textheight}\setcounter{table}{#1}%
-\addtocounter{table}{-1}\onecolumn#2\twocolumn}\setcounter{table}{#1}}
-\long\def\longtab#1#2{\setlength{\LTcapwidth}{\textwidth}%
-\setcounter{table}{#1}\addtocounter{table}{-1}\onecolumn#2\twocolumn\setcounter{table}{#1}}
-\long\def\longtabL#1#2{\setlength{\LTcapwidth}{\textheight}%
-\setcounter{table}{#1}\addtocounter{table}{-1}\onecolumn#2\twocolumn\setcounter{table}{#1}}
-%
-% Define \acknowledgements
-\def\acknowledgements{\par\addvspace{6pt}\tiny\rm
-\trivlist\item[\hskip\labelsep{\em Acknowledgements.\/}]}
-\def\endacknowledgements{\endtrivlist\addvspace{6pt}}
-%
-\newenvironment{verse}
-               {\let\\\@centercr
-                \list{}{\itemsep      \z@
-                        \itemindent   -1.5em%
-                        \listparindent\itemindent
-                        \rightmargin  \leftmargin
-                        \advance\leftmargin 1.5em}%
-                \item\relax}
-               {\endlist}
-\newenvironment{quotation}
-               {\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em%
-                        \itemindent    \listparindent
-                        \rightmargin   \leftmargin
-                        \parsep        \z@ \@plus\p@}%
-                \item\relax}
-               {\endlist}
-\newenvironment{quote}
-               {\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}%
-                \item\relax}
-               {\endlist}
-\if@compatibility
-\newenvironment{titlepage}
-    {%
-      \if@twocolumn
-        \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+% normally the page counter starts at 1
+\setcounter{page}{1}
+% however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1
+% (for duplex printing)
+\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
+   \if@twoside
+      \setcounter{page}{-1}
       \else
-        \@restonecolfalse\newpage
+      \setcounter{page}{0}
       \fi
-      \thispagestyle{empty}%
-      \setcounter{page}\z@
-    }%
-    {\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi
-    }
-\else
-\newenvironment{titlepage}
-    {%
-      \if@twocolumn
-        \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
-      \else
-        \@restonecolfalse\newpage
       \fi
-      \thispagestyle{empty}%
-      \setcounter{page}\@ne
-    }%
-    {\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi
-     \if@twoside\else
-        \setcounter{page}\@ne
+
+% standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as
+% needed when single sided
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi
+% if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and
+% enforce a rigid position for the last lines
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
+% the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn
+   \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
+      \twocolumn
      \fi
-    }
+\sloppy
+\flushbottom
 \fi
-% Appendix
-\newcounter{append}
-\setcounter{append}{0}
-\newenvironment{appendix}{\par
-\def\@hangfrom##1{\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{##1}}%
-      \hangindent \parindent\noindent\box\@tempboxa}
-\def\@seccntformat##1{\csname theap##1\endcsname\hskip\betweenumberspace}
-  \setcounter{section}{\value{append}}%
-  \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
-  \setcounter{figure}{0}%
-  \setcounter{table}{0}%
-  \newcommand\theapsection{Appendix \@Alph\c@section:}%
-  \newcommand\theapsubsection{\@Alph\c@section.\@arabic\c@subsection.}%
-  \newcommand\theapsubsubsection{\theapsubsection\@arabic\c@subsubsection.}%
-  \renewcommand\thesection{\@Alph\c@section}%
-  \renewcommand\thesubsection{\@Alph\c@section.\@arabic\c@subsection}%
-  \renewcommand\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\@arabic\c@subsubsection}%
-  \renewcommand\theequation{\@Alph\c@section.\@arabic\c@equation}%
-  \renewcommand\thefigure{\@Alph\c@section.\@arabic\c@figure}%
-  \renewcommand\thetable{\@Alph\c@section.\@arabic\c@table}%
-  \@addtoreset{equation}{section}%
-  \@addtoreset{figure}{section}%
-  \@addtoreset{table}{section}%
-  \def\subfigures{\stepcounter{figure}\setcounter{auth}{\value{figure}}%
-  \setcounter{figure}{0}%
-  \def\thefigure{\@Alph\c@section\@arabic\c@auth\alph{figure}}%
-  \def\resetsubfig{\setcounter{figure}{\value{auth}}}}}
-{
+
+
+
+
+% \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions
+
+% This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package
+% by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
+% \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command
+% is present or not.
+% For instance:
+% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}}
+% \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if
+% \appendices is invoked.
+% The command \section will behave slightly differently depending
+% on whether the user specifies a title:
+% \section{My appendix title}
+% or not:
+% \section{}
+% This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title
+% would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of
+% contents
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\Q=3
+\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
+\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
+\endgroup
+% end of \@ifmtarg defs
+
+
+% V1.7
+% command that allows the one time saving of the original definition
+% of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices
+% we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other
+% packages (hyperref.sty, etc.)
+\def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section
+\let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax}
+
+% neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument}
+% we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no
+% argument (title)
+% note we reroute the call to the old \section*
+\def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{%
+\@ifmtarg{#1}{%
+\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis}%
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection}}{%
+\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis \\* #1}%
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection: #1}}}
+
+% we use this if the user calls \section{} after
+% \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the
+% command and its argument. Then, warn the user.
+\def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless
+\protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}}
+
+
+% remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls
+% and in the Table of Contents.
+% The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself
+
+% appendix command for one single appendix
+% normally has no heading. However, if you want a
+% heading, you can do so via the optional argument:
+% \appendix[Optional Heading]
+\def\appendix{\relax}
+\renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
+    % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
+    \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}%
+    % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
+    \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
   \setcounter{section}{0}%
   \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
-  \setcounter{figure}{0}%
-  \setcounter{table}{0}%
-  \renewcommand\thesection{\c@section}%
-  \renewcommand\thesubsection{\@arabic\c@subsection}%
-  \renewcommand\thesubsubsection{\@arabic\c@subsubsection}%
-  \renewcommand\theequation{\@arabic\c@equation}%
-  \renewcommand\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}%
-  \renewcommand\thetable{\@arabic\c@table}%
-  \addtocounter{append}{1}
+    \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
+    \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
+    \gdef\thesection{A}%
+    \gdef\thesectiondis{}%
+    \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}%
+    \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A}
+    \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
+    \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}%
+                  \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{%
+             \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\\* #1}%
+             \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}%
+    % redefine \section command for appendix
+    % leave \section* as is
+    \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{%
+                    \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument
+                                                     % of the normal form
 }
-%
-\setlength\arraycolsep{2.5\p@}
-\setlength\tabcolsep{6\p@}
-\setlength\arrayrulewidth{.4\p@}
-\setlength\doublerulesep{2\p@}
-\setlength\tabbingsep{\labelsep}
-\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
-\setlength\fboxsep{3\p@}
-\setlength\fboxrule{.4\p@}
-\renewcommand\theequation{\@arabic\c@equation}
-\newcounter{figure}
-\renewcommand\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}
-\def\fps@figure{tbp}
-\def\ftype@figure{1}
-\def\ext@figure{lof}
-\def\fnum@figure{\figurename\,\thefigure}
-\newenvironment{figure}
-               {\@float{figure}}
-               {\resetsubfig\end@float}
-\newenvironment{figure*}
-               {\@dblfloat{figure}}
-               {\resetsubfig\end@dblfloat}
-\let\resetsubfig\relax
-\def\subfigures{\stepcounter{figure}\setcounter{auth}{\value{figure}}%
-\setcounter{figure}{0}\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@auth\alph{figure}}%
-\def\resetsubfig{\setcounter{figure}{\value{auth}}}}
-\newcounter{table}
-\renewcommand\thetable{\@arabic\c@table}
-\def\fps@table{tbp}
-\def\ftype@table{2}
-\def\ext@table{lot}
-\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable}
-\newenvironment{table}
-               {\small\@float{table}}
-               {\end@float}
-\newenvironment{table*}
-               {\small\@dblfloat{table}}
-               {\end@dblfloat}
-
-\def \@floatboxreset {%
-        \reset@font
-        \small
-        \@setnobreak
-        \@setminipage
+
+
+
+% appendices command for multiple appendices
+% user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to
+% declare the individual appendices
+\def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
+    % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
+    \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}%
+    % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
+    \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
+    \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0
+    \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
+    \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
+    \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices%
+    \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}%
+    \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}%
+    \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}%
+    \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}}
+    \else%
+    \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
+    \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}%
+    \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}%
+    \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}}
+    \fi%
+    \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
+    \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix
+    % redefine \section command for appendices
+    % leave \section* as is
+    \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form
+                    \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so,
+                    \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument
+                                                 % of the normal form
 }

-\newlength\abovecaptionskip
-\newlength\belowcaptionskip
-\setlength\abovecaptionskip{10\p@}
-\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0\p@}
-\newcommand\leftlegendglue{}
-
-\def\fig@type{figure}
-
-\newdimen\figcapgap\figcapgap=5pt
-\newdimen\tabcapgap\tabcapgap=10pt
-
-\@ifundefined{floatlegendstyle}{\def\floatlegendstyle{\bf}}{}
-\def\floatcounterend{.}
-
-\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\par\addcontentsline{\csname
-  ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}{\protect\numberline{\csname
-  the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}\begingroup
-    \@parboxrestore
-    \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par
-  \endgroup}

-\def\capstrut{\vrule\@width\z@\@height\topskip}
-\@ifundefined{captionstyle}{\def\captionstyle{\normalfont\small}}{}

-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
- \ifx\@captype\fig@type
-   \vskip\figcapgap
-   \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{\floatlegendstyle #1\floatcounterend}
-   \capstrut #2}%
-   \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
-     {\floatlegendstyle #1\floatcounterend} \capstrut #2\par
-   \else
-     \hbox to\hsize{\leftlegendglue\unhbox\@tempboxa\hfil}%
-   \fi
- \else
-   {\floatlegendstyle #1\floatcounterend} \capstrut #2\par
-   \vskip\tabcapgap
- \fi}
-% Define `acknowledgement' environment
-\def\acknowledgement{\par\addvspace{17pt}\tiny\rm
-\trivlist\item[\hskip\labelsep
-{\it\ackname}]}
-\def\endacknowledgement{\endtrivlist\addvspace{6pt}}
-% Define `noteadd' environment
-\def\noteadd{\par\addvspace{17pt}\small\rm
-\trivlist\item[\hskip\labelsep
-{\it\noteaddname}]}
-\def\endnoteadd{\endtrivlist\addvspace{6pt}}
+% \IEEEPARstart
+% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the
+% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter
+% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the
+% first word which will be rendered in upper case.
+% In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to:
+%
+% 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment
+%    within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart.
+% 2. auto-detect and use the current font family
+% 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that
+%    interword glue will now work as normal.
+% 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines.
+%
+% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too.
+%
+% V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users
+% to change the font style.
+%
+% the number of lines that are indented to clear it
+% may need to increase if using decenders
+\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2}
+% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart
+% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to
+% be overly cautious
+\def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2}
+% V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text
+% in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called).
+\def\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT{T}
+% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline
+% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum
+% of this value and the height of the \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current
+% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip
+% so that it can respond to changes therein.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip}
+% V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in,
+% can take zero or one argument.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\bfseries}
+% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
+% the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase}
+% V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word,
+% can take zero or one argument.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\relax}
+% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
+% the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase}
+% This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text.
+% Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced
+% to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em}
+% V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET{0em}
+% V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT{\/}
+
+% V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries}
+\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape}
+\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax}
+\fi
+
+% definition of \IEEEPARstart
+% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES
+%
+% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use
+% of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter
+% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second
+% argument is the rest of the first word(s).
+\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{%
+% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
+% on a new one
+\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}%
+% V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE
+% which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued
+\noindent
+% calculate the desired height of the big letter
+% it extends from the top of \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font
+% down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline
+\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}%
+\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}%
+% extract the name of the current font in bold
+% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME
+\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}%
+{\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}%
+\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}%
+% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired
+% height of the drop letter
+\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax%
+% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points)
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
+% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size
+\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}%
+% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the
+% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height.
+\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax%
+\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}%
+\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}%
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt%
+\fi%
+% and store it as a counter
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
+% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital
+% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB,
+% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA
+% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB
+% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer
+% division. Hence the use of the counters.
+% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will
+% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result
+\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200%
+\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB%
+% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by
+% floating point values
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
+\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
+% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter
+% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the
+% big letter.
+\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
+% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter
+% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the
+% hanging indent
+\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont
+\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}%
+% end of the isolated calculation environment
+% add in the extra clearance we want
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP\relax%
+% add in the optional offset
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax%
+% V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi
+% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the
+% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use
+% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command
+% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other
+% text won't be displaced by it.
+\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES%
+\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}%
+\raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}%
+\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}%
+\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartSEP}}}%
+{\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}}
+
+
+

+
+
+% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater
+% than the specified space of argument one
+% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero)
+% and issue a \newpage
+%
+% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill}
+%
+% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to
+% be overly cautious
+% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau
+% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations,
+% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine
+% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead
+\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left
+\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left
+\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi%
+\newpage%
+\fi\endgroup}
+
+
+
+% IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT
+% Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size)
+% As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic!
+% V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a
+% biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo.
+% MDS 7/2001
+% V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries
+\newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade
+\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue
+
+% biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies
+% and not just the previous section
+\newcounter{IEEEbiography}
+\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0}
+
+% photo area size
+\def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in}    % width of the biography photo area
+\def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in}   % depth (height) of the biography photo area
+% area cleared for photo
+\def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in}    % width cleared for the biography photo area
+\def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in}    % depth cleared for the biography photo area
+                                  % actual depth will be a multiple of
+                                  % \baselineskip, rounded up
+\def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography
+
+\newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize%
+\unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500%
+% we need enough space to support the hanging indent
+% the nominal value of the spacer
+% and one extra line for good measure
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN%
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip%
+% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
+% with a new one
+\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}%
+% nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill
+\vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
+% the default box for where the photo goes
+\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{%
+\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}%
+%
+% detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the
+% \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above
+% and if so, override the default box with what they want
+\@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}%
+\centering%
+#1%
+\end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied
+% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
+\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
+% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
+% to the biography, not the previous section
+\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
+\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
+\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
+\fi%
+% one more biography
+\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
+% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents
+\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}%
+% V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the
+% hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so
+% that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the
+% user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces.
+\let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command
+\edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par
+\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth
+\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip%  calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate
+% set the hanging indent
+\hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth%
+\hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
+% reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T
+\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}%
+% set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything
+\noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{%
+\raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}%
+% now place the author name and begin the bio text
+\noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par%
+% 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area
+% and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry
+% MDS
+\ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo
+    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad
+    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line
+    \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding
+    \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
+    \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut
+\fi%
+\par\normalfont}
+
+
+
+% V1.6
+% added biography without a photo environment
+\newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{%
+% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
+\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
+% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
+% to the biography, not the previous section
+\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
+\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
+\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
+\fi%
+% one more biography
+\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
+% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents
+\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}%
+\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500%
+\vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
+\parskip=0pt\par%
+\noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont}
+
+
+% provide the user with some old font commands
+% got this from article.cls
 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
@@ -1154,541 +4446,259 @@
 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
 \DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
 \DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
-\newcommand\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
-\newcommand\@tocrmarg{2.55em}
-\newcommand\@dotsep{4.5}
-\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
-\newcommand\tableofcontents{%
-    \section*{\contentsname
-        \@mkboth{%
-           \MakeUppercase\contentsname}{\MakeUppercase\contentsname}}%
-    \@starttoc{toc}%
-    }
-\newcommand*\l@part[2]{%
-  \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax
-    \addpenalty\@secpenalty
-    \addvspace{2.25em \@plus\p@}%
-    \begingroup
-      \setlength\@tempdima{3em}%
-      \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
-      \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
-      {\leavevmode
-       \large \bfseries #1\hfil \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}}\par
-       \nobreak
-       \if@compatibility
-         \global\@nobreaktrue
-         \everypar{\global\@nobreakfalse\everypar{}}%
-      \fi
-    \endgroup
-  \fi}
-\newcommand*\l@section[2]{%
-  \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\z@
-    \addpenalty\@secpenalty
-    \addvspace{1.0em \@plus\p@}%
-    \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}%
-    \begingroup
-      \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
-      \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
-      \leavevmode \bfseries
-      \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
-      \hskip -\leftskip
-      #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
-    \endgroup
-  \fi}
-\newcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
-\newcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{3.8em}{3.2em}}
-\newcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{7.0em}{4.1em}}
-\newcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{10em}{5em}}
-\newcommand\listoffigures{%
-    \section*{\listfigurename
-      \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}%
-              {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}}%
-    \@starttoc{lof}%
-    }
-\newcommand*\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
-\newcommand\listoftables{%
-    \section*{\listtablename
-      \@mkboth{%
-          \MakeUppercase\listtablename}{\MakeUppercase\listtablename}}%
-    \@starttoc{lot}%
-    }
-\let\l@table\l@figure
-\newdimen\bibindent
-\setlength\bibindent{\parindent}
-\def\@biblabel#1{}
-\def\@cite#1#2{{#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi}}
-\newenvironment{thebibliography}[1]
-     {\begingroup\section*{{\normalsize\refname}
-        \@mkboth{\refname}{\refname}}\tiny
-      \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
-           {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
-           \leftmargin\bibindent
-           \setlength{\itemindent}{-\leftmargin}
-           \@openbib@code
-           \usecounter{enumiv}%
-           \let\p@enumiv\@empty
-           \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
-      \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000%
-      \sfcode`\.\@m}
-     {\endlist\par\endgroup\if@longauth\kern6pt\hrule\kern6pt\institutename\@longauthfalse\fi
-      \def\@noitemerr{\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}}%


-\newcommand\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
-\let\@openbib@code\@empty
-\newenvironment{theindex}
-               {\if@twocolumn
-                  \@restonecolfalse
-                \else
-                  \@restonecoltrue
-                \fi
-                \columnseprule \z@
-                \columnsep 35\p@
-                \twocolumn[\section*{\indexname}]%
-                \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
-                        {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
-                \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
-                \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
-                \let\item\@idxitem}
-               {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
-\newcommand\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}
-\newcommand\subitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{20\p@}}
-\newcommand\subsubitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{30\p@}}
-\newcommand\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax}
-\renewcommand\footnoterule{%
-  \kern-3\p@
-  \hrule\@width.4\columnwidth
-  \kern2.6\p@}
-\newcommand\@makefntext[1]{%
-    \noindent
-    \hb@xt@\bibindent{\hss\@makefnmark\enspace}#1}
-%
-\newcommand\listofobjects{\if@nyobjects
-  \IfFileExists{\jobname.obj}%
-               {\section*{\listobjectname}%
-                \@starttoc{obj}}%
-               {\begingroup
-                   \makeatletter
-                   \if@filesw
-                      \newwrite\tf@obj
-                      \immediate\openout\tf@obj\jobname.obj
-                      \relax
-                   \fi
-                   \global\@nobreakfalse
-                \endgroup}\fi
-               }
-%
-\newcommand*\l@obj[2]{\noindent`#1' on page #2\par}
+% SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS
 %
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\object}[1]{#1\global\let\if@nyobjects\iftrue
-\addcontentsline{obj}{obj}{#1}}
-%
-\newcommand\contentsname{Contents}
-\newcommand\listfigurename{List of Figures}
-\newcommand\listobjectname{List of Objects}
-\newcommand\listtablename{List of Tables}
-\newcommand\refname{References}
-\newcommand\indexname{Index}
-\newcommand\figurename{Fig.}
-\newcommand\tablename{Table}
-\newcommand\partname{Part}
-\newcommand\appendixname{Appendix}
-\newcommand\abstractname{ABSTRACT}
-\newcommand\rnotename{(Research Note)}
-\newcommand\rnotname{(RN)}
-\newcommand\lettername{\textsc{Letter to the Editor}}
-\newcommand\ackname{Acknowledgements.}
-\newcommand\noteaddname{Note added in proof}
-\newcommand\today{}
-\edef\today{\ifcase\month\or
-  January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
-  July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
-  \space\number\day, \number\year}
-\setlength\columnsep{12pt}
-\setlength\columnseprule{0\p@}
-\frenchspacing
-\clubpenalty=10000
-\widowpenalty=10000
-\def\thisbottomragged{\def\@textbottom{\vskip\z@ plus.0001fil
-\global\let\@textbottom\relax}}
-\pagestyle{headings}
-\pagenumbering{arabic}
-\if@referee
-  \setlength{\textwidth}{0.75\textwidth}
-  \def\baselinestretch{1.5}
-  \let\AALogo\relax
-  \onecolumn
-  \AtEndDocument{\listofobjects}
-\else
-\if@onecolumn
-\onecolumn
-\else
-  \twocolumn
-\fi\fi
-\sloppy
-\flushbottom
-\def\squareforqed{\hbox{\rlap{$\sqcap$}$\sqcup$}}
-\def\sq{\ifmmode\squareforqed\else{\unskip\nobreak\hfil
-\penalty50\hskip1em\null\nobreak\hfil\squareforqed
-\parfillskip=0pt\finalhyphendemerits=0\endgraf}\fi}
-
-\def\sun{\hbox{$\odot$}}
-\def\la{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil
-$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr<\cr\sim\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr
-<\cr\sim\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
-<\cr\sim\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
-<\cr\sim\cr}}}}}
-\def\ga{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil
-$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr>\cr\sim\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr
->\cr\sim\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
->\cr\sim\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
->\cr\sim\cr}}}}}
-\def\degr{\hbox{$^\circ$}}
-\def\arcmin{\hbox{$^\prime$}}
-\def\arcsec{\hbox{$^{\prime\prime}$}}
-\def\utw{\smash{\rlap{\lower5pt\hbox{$\sim$}}}}
-\def\udtw{\smash{\rlap{\lower6pt\hbox{$\approx$}}}}
-\def\fd{\hbox{$.\!\!^{\rm d}$}}
-\def\fh{\hbox{$.\!\!^{\rm h}$}}
-\def\fm{\hbox{$.\!\!^{\rm m}$}}
-\def\fs{\hbox{$.\!\!^{\rm s}$}}
-\def\fdg{\hbox{$.\!\!^\circ$}}
-\def\farcm{\hbox{$.\mkern-4mu^\prime$}}
-\def\farcs{\hbox{$.\!\!^{\prime\prime}$}}
-\def\fp{\hbox{$.\!\!^{\scriptscriptstyle\rm p}$}}
-\def\cor{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\hbox{$\widehat=$}}{\hbox{$\widehat=$}}
-{\hbox{$\scriptstyle\hat=$}}
-{\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\hat=$}}}}
-\def\sol{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil
-$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr\sim\cr<\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr\sim\cr
-<\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr\sim\cr
-<\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
-\sim\cr<\cr}}}}}
-\def\sog{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil
-$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr\sim\cr>\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr\sim\cr
->\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
-\sim\cr>\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
-\sim\cr>\cr}}}}}
-\def\lse{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil
-$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr<\cr\simeq\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr
-<\cr\simeq\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
-<\cr\simeq\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
-<\cr\simeq\cr}}}}}
-\def\gse{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil
-$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr>\cr\simeq\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr
->\cr\simeq\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
->\cr\simeq\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
->\cr\simeq\cr}}}}}
-\def\grole{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil
-$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr>\cr\noalign{\vskip-1.5pt}<\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr
->\cr\noalign{\vskip-1.5pt}<\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
->\cr\noalign{\vskip-1pt}<\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
->\cr\noalign{\vskip-0.5pt}<\cr}}}}}
-\def\leogr{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil
-$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr<\cr\noalign{\vskip-1.5pt}>\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr
-<\cr\noalign{\vskip-1.5pt}>\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
-<\cr\noalign{\vskip-1pt}>\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
-<\cr\noalign{\vskip-0.5pt}>\cr}}}}}
-\def\loa{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil
-$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr<\cr\approx\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr
-<\cr\approx\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
-<\cr\approx\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
-<\cr\approx\cr}}}}}
-\def\goa{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil
-$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr>\cr\approx\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr
->\cr\approx\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
->\cr\approx\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
->\cr\approx\cr}}}}}
-\def\diameter{{\ifmmode\mathchoice
-{\ooalign{\hfil\hbox{$\displaystyle/$}\hfil\crcr
-{\hbox{$\displaystyle\mathchar"20D$}}}}
-{\ooalign{\hfil\hbox{$\textstyle/$}\hfil\crcr
-{\hbox{$\textstyle\mathchar"20D$}}}}
-{\ooalign{\hfil\hbox{$\scriptstyle/$}\hfil\crcr
-{\hbox{$\scriptstyle\mathchar"20D$}}}}
-{\ooalign{\hfil\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle/$}\hfil\crcr
-{\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\mathchar"20D$}}}}
-\else{\ooalign{\hfil/\hfil\crcr\mathhexbox20D}}%
-\fi}}
+% holds the special notice text
+\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax}

-\def\getsto{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip
-\halign{\hfil
-$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr\gets\cr\to\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr\gets
-\cr\to\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr\gets
-\cr\to\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
-\gets\cr\to\cr}}}}}
-\def\lid{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil
-$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr<\cr\noalign{\vskip1.2pt}=\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr<\cr
-\noalign{\vskip1.2pt}=\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr<\cr
-\noalign{\vskip1pt}=\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
-<\cr
-\noalign{\vskip0.9pt}=\cr}}}}}
-\def\gid{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil
-$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr>\cr\noalign{\vskip1.2pt}=\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr>\cr
-\noalign{\vskip1.2pt}=\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr>\cr
-\noalign{\vskip1pt}=\cr}}}
-{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
->\cr
-\noalign{\vskip0.9pt}=\cr}}}}}
-\def\bbbr{{\rm I\!R}} %reelle Zahlen
-\def\bbbm{{\rm I\!M}}
-\def\bbbn{{\rm I\!N}} %natuerliche Zahlen
-\def\bbbf{{\rm I\!F}}
-\def\bbbh{{\rm I\!H}}
-\def\bbbk{{\rm I\!K}}
-\def\bbbp{{\rm I\!P}}
-\def\bbbone{{\mathchoice {\rm 1\mskip-4mu l} {\rm 1\mskip-4mu l}
-{\rm 1\mskip-4.5mu l} {\rm 1\mskip-5mu l}}}
-\def\bbbc{{\mathchoice {\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\rm C$}\hbox{\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.9\ht0\hss}\box0}}
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\textstyle\rm C$}\hbox{\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.9\ht0\hss}\box0}}
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm C$}\hbox{\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.9\ht0\hss}\box0}}
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rm C$}\hbox{\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.9\ht0\hss}\box0}}}}
-\def\bbbq{{\mathchoice {\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\rm
-Q$}\hbox{\raise
-0.05\ht0\hbox to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.9\ht0\hss}\box0}}
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\textstyle\rm Q$}\hbox{\raise
-0.05\ht0\hbox to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.9\ht0\hss}\box0}}
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm Q$}\hbox{\raise
-0.05\ht0\hbox to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.8\ht0\hss}\box0}}
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rm Q$}\hbox{\raise
-0.05\ht0\hbox to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.8\ht0\hss}\box0}}}}
-\def\bbbt{{\mathchoice {\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\rm
-T$}\hbox{\hbox to0pt{\kern0.25\wd0\vrule height0.95\ht0\hss}\box0}}
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\textstyle\rm T$}\hbox{\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.25\wd0\vrule height0.95\ht0\hss}\box0}}
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm T$}\hbox{\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.25\wd0\vrule height0.95\ht0\hss}\box0}}
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rm T$}\hbox{\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.25\wd0\vrule height0.95\ht0\hss}\box0}}}}
-\def\bbbs{{\mathchoice
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\rm S$}\hbox{\raise0.5\ht0\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.38\wd0\vrule height0.45\ht0\hss}\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.52\wd0\vrule height0.5\ht0\hss}\box0}}
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\textstyle \rm S$}\hbox{\raise0.5\ht0\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.38\wd0\vrule height0.45\ht0\hss}\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.52\wd0\vrule height0.5\ht0\hss}\box0}}
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptstyle \rm S$}\hbox{\raise0.5\ht0\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.38\wd0\vrule height0.45\ht0\hss}\raise0.05\ht0\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.52\wd0\vrule height0.45\ht0\hss}\box0}}
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rm S$}\hbox{\raise0.5\ht0\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.38\wd0\vrule height0.45\ht0\hss}\raise0.05\ht0\hbox
-to0pt{\kern0.52\wd0\vrule height0.45\ht0\hss}\box0}}}}
-\def\bbbz{{\mathchoice {\hbox{$\sf\textstyle Z\kern-0.4em Z$}}
-{\hbox{$\sf\textstyle Z\kern-0.4em Z$}}
-{\hbox{$\sf\scriptstyle Z\kern-0.3em Z$}}
-{\hbox{$\sf\scriptscriptstyle Z\kern-0.2em Z$}}}}
-\def\ts{\thinspace}
-%
-% Bibliography and bibfile
-\def\aj{AJ}%
-          % Astronomical Journal
-\def\actaa{Acta Astron.}%
-          % Acta Astronomica
-\def\araa{ARA\&A}%
-          % Annual Review of Astron and Astrophys
-\def\apj{ApJ}%
-          % Astrophysical Journal
-\def\apjl{ApJ}%
-          % Astrophysical Journal, Letters
-\def\apjs{ApJS}%
-          % Astrophysical Journal, Supplement
-\def\ao{Appl.~Opt.}%
-          % Applied Optics
-\def\apss{Ap\&SS}%
-          % Astrophysics and Space Science
-\def\aap{A\&A}%
-          % Astronomy and Astrophysics
-\def\aapr{A\&A~Rev.}%
-          % Astronomy and Astrophysics Reviews
-\def\aaps{A\&AS}%
-          % Astronomy and Astrophysics, Supplement
-\def\azh{AZh}%
-          % Astronomicheskii Zhurnal
-\def\baas{BAAS}%
-          % Bulletin of the AAS
-\def\bac{Bull. astr. Inst. Czechosl.}%
-          % Bulletin of the Astronomical Institutes of Czechoslovakia
-\def\caa{Chinese Astron. Astrophys.}%
-          % Chinese Astronomy and Astrophysics
-\def\cjaa{Chinese J. Astron. Astrophys.}%
-          % Chinese Journal of Astronomy and Astrophysics
-\def\icarus{Icarus}%
-          % Icarus
-\def\jcap{J. Cosmology Astropart. Phys.}%
-          % Journal of Cosmology and Astroparticle Physics
-\def\jrasc{JRASC}%
-          % Journal of the RAS of Canada
-\def\mnras{MNRAS}%
-          % Monthly Notices of the RAS
-\def\memras{MmRAS}%
-          % Memoirs of the RAS
-\def\na{New A}%
-          % New Astronomy
-\def\nar{New A Rev.}%
-          % New Astronomy Review
-\def\pasa{PASA}%
-          % Publications of the Astron. Soc. of Australia
-\def\pra{Phys.~Rev.~A}%
-          % Physical Review A: General Physics
-\def\prb{Phys.~Rev.~B}%
-          % Physical Review B: Solid State
-\def\prc{Phys.~Rev.~C}%
-          % Physical Review C
-\def\prd{Phys.~Rev.~D}%
-          % Physical Review D
-\def\pre{Phys.~Rev.~E}%
-          % Physical Review E
-\def\prl{Phys.~Rev.~Lett.}%
-          % Physical Review Letters
-\def\pasp{PASP}%
-          % Publications of the ASP
-\def\pasj{PASJ}%
-          % Publications of the ASJ
-\def\qjras{QJRAS}%
-          % Quarterly Journal of the RAS
-\def\rmxaa{Rev. Mexicana Astron. Astrofis.}%
-          % Revista Mexicana de Astronomia y Astrofisica
-\def\skytel{S\&T}%
-          % Sky and Telescope
-\def\solphys{Sol.~Phys.}%
-          % Solar Physics
-\def\sovast{Soviet~Ast.}%
-          % Soviet Astronomy
-\def\ssr{Space~Sci.~Rev.}%
-          % Space Science Reviews
-\def\zap{ZAp}%
-          % Zeitschrift fuer Astrophysik
-\def\nat{Nature}%
-          % Nature
-\def\iaucirc{IAU~Circ.}%
-          % IAU Cirulars
-\def\aplett{Astrophys.~Lett.}%
-          % Astrophysics Letters
-\def\apspr{Astrophys.~Space~Phys.~Res.}%
-          % Astrophysics Space Physics Research
-\def\bain{Bull.~Astron.~Inst.~Netherlands}%
-          % Bulletin Astronomical Institute of the Netherlands
-\def\fcp{Fund.~Cosmic~Phys.}%
-          % Fundamental Cosmic Physics
-\def\gca{Geochim.~Cosmochim.~Acta}%
-          % Geochimica Cosmochimica Acta
-\def\grl{Geophys.~Res.~Lett.}%
-          % Geophysics Research Letters
-\def\jcp{J.~Chem.~Phys.}%
-          % Journal of Chemical Physics
-\def\jgr{J.~Geophys.~Res.}%
-          % Journal of Geophysics Research
-\def\jqsrt{J.~Quant.~Spec.~Radiat.~Transf.}%
-          % Journal of Quantitiative Spectroscopy and Radiative Trasfer
-\def\memsai{Mem.~Soc.~Astron.~Italiana}%
-          % Mem. Societa Astronomica Italiana
-\def\nphysa{Nucl.~Phys.~A}%
-          % Nuclear Physics A
-\def\physrep{Phys.~Rep.}%
-          % Physics Reports
-\def\physscr{Phys.~Scr}%
-          % Physica Scripta
-\def\planss{Planet.~Space~Sci.}%
-          % Planetary Space Science
-\def\procspie{Proc.~SPIE}%
-          % Proceedings of the SPIE
-\let\astap=\aap
-\let\apjlett=\apjl
-\let\apjsupp=\apjs
-\let\applopt=\ao
-%
-\uchyph=0
-%
-\long\def\Online{\if@online\else\@onlinetrue
-\clearpage
-\def\ps@Onlheadings{%
-    \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
-    \def\@evenhead{\hfil\leftmark, {\it Online Material p~\thepage}\hfil}%
-    \def\@oddhead{\hfil\rightmark, {\it Online Material p~\thepage}\hfil}%
-    \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
-    \let\sectionmark\@gobble
-    \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
-    }
-\setcounter{page}{1}
-\pagestyle{Onlheadings}
-%% 2008
-%% \twocolumn[\vspace*{4cm}\noindent{\sffamily\bfseries\Huge\centerline{Online Material}}]
-%% \vfill
-%% \clearpage
+% for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do:
+% \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle
+\def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
+\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}%
+\else%
+\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}%
 \fi}
-\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{\let\bibpreamble\relax\newcommand{\bibfont}{\tiny}%
-\renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{%
- \bibsection\parindent \z@\bibpreamble\bibfont\list
-   {\@biblabel{\arabic{NAT@ctr}}}{\@bibsetup{#1}%
-    \setcounter{NAT@ctr}{0}}%
-    \ifNAT@openbib
-      \renewcommand\newblock{\par}
-    \else
-      \renewcommand\newblock{\hskip .11em \@plus.33em \@minus.07em}%
-    \fi
-    \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000
-    \sfcode`\.=1000\relax
-    \let\citeN\cite \let\shortcite\cite
-    \let\citeasnoun\cite
- }{\if@longauth\kern6pt\hrule\kern6pt\institutename\@longauthfalse\fi\def\@noitemerr{%
-  \PackageWarning{natbib}
-     {Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
-  \endlist\vskip-\lastskip}}{}
-\@ifpackageloaded{longtable}{%
-\def\LT@makecaption#1#2#3{%
-  \LT@mcol\LT@cols c{\hbox to\z@{\hss\parbox[t]\LTcapwidth{%
-    \small\sbox\@tempboxa{#1{{\bfseries#2.} }#3}%
-    \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa>\hsize
-      #1{{\bfseries#2.} }#3%
-    \else
-      \hbox to\hsize{\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
-    \fi
-    \endgraf\vskip\baselineskip}%
-  \hss}}}}{}
-}%AtBeginDocument
-%
-\endinput
+
+
+
+
+% PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS
+% to insert a publisher's ID footer
+% V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style
+% occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle
+% use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page
+% These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into
+% consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author
+% names and the maintext.
+%
+% the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the
+% publisher's ID footer
+% IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals,
+% dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction
+\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip}
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
+% for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no
+% dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the
+% in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the
+% second column
+% There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on
+% Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for
+% technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip
+% and call it even.
+\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip}
+\fi
+
+% V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt}
+\fi
+
+% holds the ID text
+\def\@IEEEpubid{\relax}
+
+% flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called
+\newif\if@IEEEusingpubid
+\global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse
+% issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom
+% V1.6 use before \maketitle
+\def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue}
+
+
+% command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in
+% to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of
+% the title page when using \IEEEpubid
+% Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or
+% if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid
+% currently needed in for the second column of a page with the
+% publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this
+% command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility
+% v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been
+% selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page.
+% V1.7 do nothing if compsoc
+\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
+\if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+
+% Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other
+% gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to
+% implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX.
+
+
+
+%% Lockout some commands under various conditions
+
+% general purpose bit bucket
+\newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin}
+
+% flags to prevent multiple warning messages
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext
+\@IEEEWARNthankstrue
+\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue
+\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue
+\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue
+\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue
+\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue
+\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue
+\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue
+
+
+%% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed
 %%
-%% End of file `aa.cls'.
+% save commands which might be locked out
+% so that the user can later restore them if needed
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext
+
+
+% disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode
+% This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter
+% algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch
+% At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft
+% paper.
+\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
+ is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
+\fi
+% and for technotes
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
+\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
+ is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
+\fi
+
+
+% lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+% when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid,
+% \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text.
+% \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead
+% warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen
+% from filling up with redundant messages
+\def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse}
+\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
+
+
+% LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently.
+% the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname
+% (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname )
+% the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine
+% whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the
+% default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command
+% we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX
+% ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break.
+% Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal
+% name can be left undisturbed.
+\newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse%
+\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
+% and make biography point to our bogus biography
+\let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography
+\let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography
+
+\renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse%
+\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
+
+\def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse}
+\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse}
+\def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse}
+\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse}
+\fi
+
+
+% provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out
+\def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{%
+\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}%
+\let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks%
+\let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart%
+\let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography%
+\let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography%
+\let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto%
+\let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto%
+\let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid%
+\let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol%
+\let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership%
+\let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext}
+
+
+
+% need a backslash character for typeout output
+{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12
+|xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}}
+
+
+% hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings
+\def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno).
+Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}}
+
+
+% provide for legacy commands
+\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA}
+\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN}
+\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark}
+\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart}
+\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid}
+\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol}
+\def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED}
+\def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed}
+\def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen}
+\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice}
+
+
+
+% provide for legacy environments
+\def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography}
+\def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto}
+\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords}
+\def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography}
+\def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto}
+\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords}
+
+
+% provide for legacy IED commands/lengths when possible
+\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent
+\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin}
+\def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth}
+\def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep}
+\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}
+\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}
+\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}
+
+
+
+% let \proof use the IEEEtran version even after amsthm is loaded
+% \proof is now deprecated in favor of \IEEEproof
+\AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}}
+
+% V1.7 \overrideIEEEmargins is no longer supported.
+\def\overrideIEEEmargins{%
+\typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}%
+\typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}}
+
+
+\endinput
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls  %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% That's all folks!
+

 

Close Window
 
  The service has been written by
Heinrich Stamerjohanns